Chrysler Journey Owner`s manual

Chrysler Journey Owner`s manual
2014 JOURNEY
2014
OWNER’S MANUAL
Chrysler Group LLC
14JC49-126-AA
First Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
JOURNEY
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name Chrysler
Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol
levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t
drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a
friend, or use public transportation.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on
this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of
features and equipment that are no longer available or were
not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features
and equipment described in this manual that are not on this
vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your
judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never
drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2013 Chrysler Group LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .6
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .7
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
1
4 INTRODUCTION
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techCongratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
nicians and genuine parts, and cares about your satisfacLLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
tion.
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it Consult the following table for a description of the
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
this Owner’s Manual:
INTRODUCTION 5
1
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel and is visible from
outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This
number also appears stamped on the right front door sill
under the sill moulding and printed on the Automobile
Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on
your vehicle, the vehicle registration and title.
VIN Location
INTRODUCTION 7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
Stamped VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . .14 䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
䡵 SENTRY KEY® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . .23
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .18
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters. . . . . . . .24
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .24
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . .27
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . .57
䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . .57
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
▫ Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) . . .60
䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
䡵 LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . .65
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) —
䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Advanced Front Air Bag Features . . . . . . . . . . .68
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . .72
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .105
. . . . . .106
. . . . . .106
. . . . . .107
The
. . . . . .108
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
2
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) has four operating
positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start
transmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN).
RUN will illuminate.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Feature
NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with
This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ the push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may
feature, (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙ in ⬙Things To have a low or dead battery. In this situation a back up
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further informa- method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put
tion).
the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the
Key Fob against the ENGINE START/STOP button and
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
push to operate the ignition switch.
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
switch with the push of a button, as long as the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger
compartment.
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
Key Fob
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in
the rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead.
The emergency key is also for locking the glove box. You
can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking.
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON/RUN
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
on the back of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb
and then pull the key out with your other hand.
2
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
Opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in ACC or
ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind
you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the chime,
the ignition or accessory on message will display in the
cluster.
NOTE: With the Uconnect® system, the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power
outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature. The time for this
Emergency Key Removal
feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings”
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and push
ignition button to place ignition in OFF position.
When leaving the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
(Continued)
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the Key Fob from vehicle, cycle the ignition
OFF and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
CAUTION!
2
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start
the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system prevents unauthorengine being shut off after two seconds.
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
or unlocked.
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon
The system uses a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) and a as possible by an authorized dealer.
SENTRY KEY®
RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not compatAfter cycling the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems.
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it problems and loss of security protection.
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an authocannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
rized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
CAUTION!
is one that has never been programmed.
• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer Syslock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat- tem serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
tended.
authorized dealer.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
always remember to place the ignition in the OFF Customer Key Programming
position.
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
Replacement Keys
2
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the following audible and visible signals: the horn will
pulse, the headlights will turn on, the park lamps and/or
The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules Part 15
turn signals will flash, and the Vehicle Security Light in
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
the instrument cluster will flash.
subject to the following conditions:
Rearming Of The System
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
• This device must accept any interference that may be
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn
received, including interference that may cause undeoff after 3 minutes, turn all of the visual signals off after
sired operation.
15 additional minutes, and then the Vehicle Security
Alarm will rearm itself.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors To Arm The System
and liftgate for unauthorized entry and the Keyless Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
Enter-N-Go™ Start/Stop button for unauthorized operation. While the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, interior 1. Make sure the vehicle ignition system is ⬙OFF⬙ (refer to
⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating⬙ for
switches for door locks are disabled. If something trigfurther information).
gers the alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will provide
General Information
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the To Disarm The System
vehicle:
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
• Press LOCK on the interior power door lock switch the following methods:
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
• Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
• Press the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the
same exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙ • Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle with a
valid Key Fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the passive entry
in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for
door handle (if equipped, refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-Nfurther information).
Go™⬙ in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve• Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
hicle⬙ for further information).
(RKE) transmitter.
• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
3. If any doors are open, close them.
position.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
press the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Start/Stop button
(requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle).
2
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N- If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
Go™, insert a valid key into the ignition switch and becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
turn the key to the ON position.
exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this
NOTE:
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button
Tamper Alert
on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
Vehicle Security Alarm.
your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
Vehicle Security Alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
Security System Manual Override
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ- The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the doors using the manual door lock plunger.
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
NOTE:
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the • The front courtesy overhead console and door courRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
tesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the
doors or open any door or liftgate.
⬙Dome ON⬙ position (extreme top position).
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the • The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur(extreme bottom position).
ther information.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
The interior lights will fade to off after approximately 30
seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position from the OFF open the liftgate, or activate the Panic Alarm from
distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a
position.
hand-held Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE
transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to
activate the system.
2
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
disables the system from responding to all RKE transmit- Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
ter buttons for all RKE transmitters.
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate. The
turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock
signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
Key Fob With RKE Transmitter
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
Flash Lights With Remote Key
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
the current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights
will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the
signal.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
equipped through Uconnect®. To change the current
setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
2
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
by the system.
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
headlights will turn on, the park lights and turn signals Programming Additional Transmitters
will flash, the horn will pulse on and off, and the interior
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
lights will turn on.
performed at an authorized dealer.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
Transmitter Battery Replacement
you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
(24 km/h) or greater.
Using The Panic Alarm
NOTE:
NOTE:
• The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the ignition • Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while the
Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
and horn will remain on.
housing or the printed circuit board.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical 2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves
with your thumb and then pull the key out with your
of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage
other hand.
the seal during removal.
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) Emergency Key Removal
Separating RKE Transmitter Case
2
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign
on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery
clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions:
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two 1. A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected
life of the battery is a minimum of three years.
halves together.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
radios.
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
General Information
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry engine will remote start:
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve• Shift lever in PARK
niently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of • Doors closed
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
• Hood closed
NOTE:
• Liftgate closed
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
• HAZARD switch off
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• BRAKE switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
• Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may
reduce this range.
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• RKE PANIC button not pressed
2
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• System not disabled from previous remote start event Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped
• Vehicle Security Alarm not active
The following messages will display in the EVIC if the
• Ignition in OFF position
vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prematurely:
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Aborted — L/Gate Ajar
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is cycled
to the ON/RUN position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
• For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
in the Remote Start mode.
Press and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec- • The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
onds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parking
15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if
the ignition must be cycled to the RUN position before
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
cycle.
Vehicle
NOTE:
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Remote Start mode.
Start request.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
2
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated and
deactivated through the Uconnect® system. For more
Before the end of 15-minute cycle, press and release the
information on Remote Start Comfort System operation
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the
refer to “Uconnect® Settings — Customer Programmable
doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle,
press and release the START/STOP button.
DOOR LOCKS
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
NOTE: The message “Push Start Button” will display in Manual Door Locks
the EVIC until you push the START button.
To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
trim panel downward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
When remote start is activated, the driver heated seat inside door handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear
feature will automatically turn on in cold weather. This doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel
feature will stay on through the duration of remote start upward.
or until the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN
position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
WARNING!
Manual Door Lock Knob
If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door,
the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is
not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
NOTE: The manual door locks will not lock or unlock
the liftgate.
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries or death.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Allowing
children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous
for a number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
(Continued)
2
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the in the ACC or ON/
RUN mode. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate.
Power Door Lock Switch Location
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry) system. For further
information, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
If you press the power door lock switch, and any front
door is open, the power locks will not operate. This
prevents you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in
the vehicle. Removing the Key Fob or closing the door
will allow the locks to operate. If a door is open, and the
ignition is in the LOCK or ACC position, a chime will
sound as a reminder to remove the Key Fob.
Auto Unlock On Exit
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer per written request of the customer.
Please see your authorized dealer for service.
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled.
2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
4. Any vehicle door is opened.
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
2
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To Engage The Child-Protection Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key (or alike) into the
child lock control and rotate it to the LOCK position.
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
NOTE:
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
NOTE: When the Child-Protection Door Lock system is
engaged, the door can be opened only by using the
outside door handle even though the inside door lock is
in the unlocked position.
• After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock system, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the desired position.
• For emergency exit with the system engaged, move
the lock knob up to the UNLOCK position, roll down
the window, and open the door with the outside
door handle.
2
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Disengage The Child-Protection Door Lock
System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key (or alike) into the
child lock control and rotate it to the UNLOCK
position.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
NOTE: After disengaging the Child-Protection Door
Lock system, always test the door from the inside to
make certain it is in the desired position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
• If the vehicle is unlocked by the RKE transmitter or
Passive Entry and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds,
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
the vehicle will re-lock and if equipped will arm the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
theft alarm.
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™. This feature allows you
to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
NOTE:
(1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the driver’s front
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru- The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
door is unlocked.
ment Panel” for further information.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower response time.
2
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors and the
liftgate automatically.
NOTE: All doors and the liftgate will unlock when the
front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the
driver’s door unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Grabbing The Driver’s Door Handle
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed all
doors will unlock when you grab hold of the driver’s front
door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE
Transmitter In Vehicle
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function if the ignition is OFF.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors
have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and
outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE
transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other
valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected outside the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically
unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times
(on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive
Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle).
To Enter The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft
(1.0 m) of the liftgate, press the button underneath the left
side of the accent bar, which is located on the liftgate
below the glass, to lock or unlock the vehicle.
2
Liftgate Unlock/Lock Button
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handle, press the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors and liftgate.
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pressing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
Press The Door Handle Button To Lock
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
NOTE:
WINDOWS
• After pressing the door handle LOCK button, you Power Windows
must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock The window controls on the driver’s door trim panel
the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This control all of the door windows.
is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by
pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting
and unlocking.
• If Passive Entry is disabled using Uconnect® System,
the key protection described in ⬙Preventing Inadvertent Locking of Passive Entry RKE Transmitter in
Vehicle⬙ remains active/functional.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.
Power Window Switches
2
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
The window controls will operate when the ignition is in
the ON/RUN or ACC position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect®, the
power window switches will remain active for up to 10
minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The
time is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle. Do not
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location
accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
Auto-Down Feature
The driver’s power window switch has an Auto-down
feature. Press the window switch past the first detent,
release, and the window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, press the window switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during autoOn some models, the driver and front passenger power
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
window switches have an Auto-up feature. Pull the
first detent and hold to close window manually.
window switch up to the second detent, release, and the
window will go up automatically.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto-up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, pull the window switch
up to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
NOTE:
• If the window runs into any obstacle during Autoclosure, it will reverse direction and then go back
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window
switch again to close the window.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. To avoid personal injury, be sure to
clear your arms, hands, fingers, and objects from the
window path before closing the window. Such entrapment may result in serious injury.
2
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the down position). To enable the window controls, press
and release the window lockout button again (setting it in
Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window
the up position).
probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
Reset Auto-Up
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue
to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim
panel allows you to disable the window control on the
rear passenger doors. To disable the window controls,
press and release the window lockout button (setting it in
Window Lockout Switch
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
Wind Buffeting
LIFTGATE
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.
The liftgate can be unlocked or locked pressing the
UNLOCK or LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter, the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive
Entry) LOCK/UNLOCK button underneath the left side
of the accent bar, which is located on the liftgate below
the glass or by activating the power door lock switch
located on either front door trim panel.
For further information on Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry), refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
NOTE: The liftgate cannot be unlocked or locked with
the manual door lock plungers on the door trim panels or
the door lock cylinder on the driver’s door.
2
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To open the unlocked liftgate, squeeze the handle and NOTE: Because the gas pressure drops with temperapull the liftgate toward you. Gas props will raise and ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when
support the liftgate in the open position.
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. These fumes could
injure you and your passengers. Keep the liftgate
closed when you are operating the vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
blower switch on the climate control is set at high
speed. Do not use the recirculation mode.
Liftgate Release
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
wheel
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
• Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating • Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may
positions
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant
energy during an impact event
• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passenger
• Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) located • All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) include
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs) or a cinching
on top of the front seats (integrated into the head
latch plate, or both, which lock the seat belt webbing
restraint)
into position by extending the belt all the way out and
• Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain
a child seat or secure a large item in a seat — if
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
equipped
that span the front, second, and third row seating for
the driver and passengers seated next to a window
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
2
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren (LATCH).
WARNING!
• Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rearward
facing infant seat.
• Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage
inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different
rates of inflation based on several factors, including the
severity and type of collision.
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or beltrisk of harm from a deploying air bag:
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
buckled up in a rear seat.
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child 5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ.
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced
Front Air Bags room to inflate.
4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
air bags.
(Continued)
2
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) also
need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or
window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• Being too close to the Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) and/or Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bag (SAB) during deployment could cause
you to be severely injured or killed.
(Continued)
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
Lap/Shoulder Belts
WARNING! (Continued)
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
combination lap/shoulder belts.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision best.
• Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
(Continued)
(Continued)
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in an collision, the belt will
lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
WARNING!
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the front seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is located on the pillar near the
Pulling Out Lap/Shoulder Belt
back of your seat. Grasp the latch plate and pull out
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
necessary to make the belt go around your lap.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
Connecting Latch Plate To Buckle
(Continued)
2
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal
injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull
up a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it
is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A
snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a
collision.
Removing Slack From Belt
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across
your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt
is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your
vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
2
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver’s seat and front passenger’s seat, the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck. Push and fully
depress the button above the webbing to release the
anchorage, then move it up or down to the position that
fits you best.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
As a guide, if you are shorter than average you will
prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage try to move it up and down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
In the rear seat, move toward the center of the seat to Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
position the belt away from your neck.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) or a
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
cinching latch plate which are used to secure a child
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
restraint system. For additional information, refer to
shoulder belt.
“Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt”
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the under the “Child Restraints” section. The chart below
anchor point.
defines the type of feature for each seating position.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create
a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
First Row
Second Row
Third Row
Driver
N/A
ALR
ALR
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
• N/A — Not Applicable
Center
N/A
Cinch
N/A
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the • ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
folded webbing.
Passenger
ALR
ALR
ALR
2
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an position that has a belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and under should always be properly reALR and is being used for normal usage:
strained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortthe entire belt is extracted.
ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
Equipped
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically preUnbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is availMode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
able on all passenger-seating positions with a combinalocking mode.
tion lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
WARNING!
• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if
the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to the
procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices may improve the performance of the seat
belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant
early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy worn snugly and positioned properly.
Management feature in the front seating positions to help The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Refurther reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretencollision.
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This
feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on
the occupant’s chest.
2
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts.
These head restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may
not deploy in the event of a front or side impact.
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
However if during a front impact, a secondary rear
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the severwhether the severity, or type of rear impact will require ity and type of the impact.
the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear
impact requires deployment, both the driver and front
passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
CAUTION!
All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in order
to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
collision.
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting Active
Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle”.
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
1 — Head Restraint Front Half
(Soft Foam and Trim)
2 — Seatback
3 — Head Restraint Back Half
(Decorative Plastic Rear Cover)
4 — Head Restraint Guide
Tubes
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in a collision,
you must reset the head restraint on the driver’s and
front passenger seat. You can recognize when the Active
Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they
have moved forward (as shown in step three of the
resetting procedure).
2
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat.
3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the
vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism.
Hand Positioning Points On AHR
2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at
a comfortable position.
1 — Downward Movement
2 — Rearward Movement
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
2
AHR In Reset Position
3 — Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism
NOTE:
4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock • If you have difficulties or problems resetting the Active
into the back decorative plastic half.
Head Restraints, see an authorized dealer.
• For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints
checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized dealer.
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert®)
BeltAlert® is a feature intended to remind the driver and
front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
BeltAlert®) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active
whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
fastened.
unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph
(8 km/h), BeltAlert® will provide both audio and visual
notification.
The front passenger seat BeltAlert® is not active when
the front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert® may
be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the
front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in
the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers
The BeltAlert® warning sequence begins after the vehicle that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly
stowed.
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. BeltAlert® can be enabled or disabled by your authoOnce the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire rized dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend
duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened. deactivating BeltAlert®.
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
NOTE: Although BeltAlert® has been deactivated, the
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occuwhile the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with
pants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is
BeltAlert®) seat belt remains unfastened.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
long enough. When it is not required, remove the exthroughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
tender and store it.
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug and in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
2
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.
In addition, the vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Driver Side Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
panel below the steering column.
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
3 — Supplemental Driver Side
Knee Air Bag/Knee Bolster
2 — Knee Bolster
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
NOTE: The Driver and Front Passenger Advanced Front This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Air Bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front,
and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABIC
Advanced Air Bags.
air bags are located above the side windows and their
The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator
covers are labeled: SRS AIRBAG.
design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of
inflation based on several factors, including the severity This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental SeatMounted Side Air Bags (SAB). The SABs are marked with
and type of collision.
an air bag label sewn into the outboard side of the front
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
seats.
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon NOTE:
seat position.
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
but they will open during air bag deployment.
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The • After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
2
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Bag System Components
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag • Front and Side Impact Sensors
system components:
• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Seat Track Position Sensors
• Air Bag Warning Light
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
• Steering Wheel and Column
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors.
• Instrument Panel
• Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
• Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
used for more severe collisions.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel, because any such
objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
SAB may provide enhanced protection to help protect an
occupant during a side impact. The Supplemental SeatMounted Side Air Bag is marked with an air bag label
sewn into the outboard side of the front seats.
Seat Mounted Side Air Bag Label
2
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the
front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag
deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left
air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air
bag only.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC)
SABIC air bags may offer side-impact and vehicle rollover protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants
in addition to that provided by the body structure. Each
air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the
Supplemental Side Curtain Air Bags
head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential
for side-impact head injuries. The curtains deploy down- NOTE:
ward, covering both windows on the impact side.
• Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners
and/or SAB and SABIC air bags on both sides of the
vehicle may deploy.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
The system includes side impact sensors that are calibrated to deploy the SAB and SABIC air bags during
impacts that require air bag occupant protection.
WARNING!
• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the location of the SABIC.
The area where the SABIC is located should remain
free from any obstructions.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side air bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags, do
not have any accessory items installed which will
alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Occupants, including children who are
up against or very close to SAB or SABIC air bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants, especially children, should not lean on or sleep against the door, side
2
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
windows, or area where the SAB or SABIC air bags Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Air Bags and the Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint.
work with the knee impact bolsters to provide improved
Always sit upright as possible with your back against the
protection for the driver and front passenger.
seat back, use the seat belts properly, and use the
appropriate sized child restraint, infant restraint or Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
child.
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
required for this vehicle.
The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag provides
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
enhanced protection and works together with the Driver
side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required.
Advanced Front Air Bag during a frontal impact.
Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic
Knee Impact Bolsters
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the bags, Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags, Suppledriver and front passenger, and position the front occu- mental Driver Side Knee Air Bag, and front seat belt
pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front pretensioners, as required, depending on several factors,
including the severity and type of impact.
Air Bags.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver
Side Knee Air Bag are designed to provide additional
protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain
frontal collisions depending on several factors, including
the severity and type of collision. Advanced Front Air
Bags and the Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag are
not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions.
The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver
Side Knee Air Bag will not deploy in all frontal collisions,
including some that may produce substantial vehicle
damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck
underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other
hand, depending on the type and location of impact,
Advanced Front Air Bags and the Supplemental Driver
Side Knee Air Bag may deploy in crashes with little
vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe
initial deceleration.
The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions.
Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and
type of collision.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition is in the
ON/RUN position. If the ignition is in the OFF position,
or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not on and
the air bags will not inflate.
2
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light Inflator Units
comes on again after initial startup.
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru- Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering
ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates
are possible, based on several factors, including the
collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim
cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
their full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70
milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Inflator Unit
The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag unit is
located in the instrument panel trim beneath the steering
column. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the
air bag, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Supplemental
Driver Side Knee Air Bag. The trim cover separates and
folds out of the way allowing the air bag to inflate to the
full size. The air bag fully inflates in about 15 to 20
milliseconds.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB)
Inflator Units
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the
vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) are
designed to activate only in certain side collisions.
bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side
air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of
collision.
2
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air
bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be
triggered, releasing a large quantity of non-toxic gas. The
inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space
between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully
inflates in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves
at a very high speed and with such a high force that it
could injure you if you are not seated properly, or if items
are positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates.
This especially applies to children.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Inflator Units
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side
curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushes
the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
covers the window. The air bag inflates in about 30
milliseconds (about one-quarter of the time that it takes
to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you
are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag
inflates. This especially applies to children. The side
curtain air bag is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when
it is inflated.
Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time,
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
During collisions where the impact is confined to a
whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may
deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity NOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SAB and
and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will SABIC air bags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle.
deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the
removed.
ORC in determining appropriate response to impact
events.
• Unlock the doors automatically.
Front And Side Impact Sensors
Enhanced Accident Response System
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
the communication network remains intact, and the changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF.
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the If A Deployment Occurs
event the ORC will determine whether to have the
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the followimmediately after deployment.
ing functions:
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or the air bag system.
until the ignition is cycled to off.
2
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
• The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deyou might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. bags will not be in place to protect you.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
WARNING!
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
immediately.
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retracparticles. The particles are a normal by-product of the tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer improcess that generates the non-toxic gas used for air mediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Conbag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the troller (ORC) system serviced as well.
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
2
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Bag Warning Light
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
proper air bag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
fuse is good.
You will want to have the air bags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of
the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service Event Data Recorder (EDR)
the air bag system immediately.
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
eight second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of are recorded. However, other parties, such as law entime, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
is designed to record such data as:
crash investigation.
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
were buckled/fastened;
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
vehicle or the EDR.
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
Child Restraints
These data can help provide a better understanding of
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a United States, and every Canadian province, requires
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per- is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
2
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly • http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/safedriversbuckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
childsafety-index-53.htm
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org or
call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canadian residents should refer
to Transport Canada’s website for additional information:
• “Extreme Hazard! Do not use a rearward-facing
child restraint on a seat protected by an air bag in
front of it!” Refer to visor and door shut face
mounted labels for information.
• In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny
baby, can become a projectile inside the vehicle.
The force required to hold even an infant on your
lap could become so great that you could not hold
the child, no matter how strong you are. The child
and others could be badly injured. Any child
riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infants and
Toddlers
Small Children
Larger Children
Children Too Large
for Child Restraints
Child Size, Height, Weight or Age
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached the
height or weight limits of their child
restraint
Children who are at least two years old or
who have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint
Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are too
small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight limit
of their booster seat
Recommended Type of Child Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
2
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
rearward-facing by children who have outgrown their
infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Safety experts recommend that children ride rearwardChildren should remain rearward-facing until they reach
facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until
the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear
child seat.
facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can
be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible
WARNING!
child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the • Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
years or younger, including a child in a rearward
Convertible child seats can be used either rearward-facing
facing infant seat.
or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
•
Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a
often have a higher weight limit in the rearward-facing
vehicle
with a rear seat.
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
Infants And Child Restraints
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
2
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Integrated Child Booster Seat — If Equipped
The Integrated Child Booster Seat is located in each
outboard second-row passenger seat. The Booster Seat is
designed for children weighing between 48 and 85 lbs (22
and 39 kg) and between 47 in (119 cm) and 57 in (145 cm)
tall.
To position a child into the Integrated Child Booster Seat
follow these steps:
1. Slide the second row seat to the full rear position to
use the Integrated Child Booster Seat.
Release Loop
NOTE: The second row bench with Integrated Child
Booster Seat must remain in the full rear position during use. 3. Lift the seat cushion up and push back to lock it in the
booster seat position.
2. Pull the release loop forward to release the latch and
seat cushion.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
NOTE: The lap portion of the seat belt should be low on
the hips and as snug as possible.
7. Once the seat belt is long enough to fit properly, insert
the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Booster Seat
4. Place the child upright in the seat with their back
firmly against the seatback.
5. Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt.
Proper Belt Use
6. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary
8. To remove the slack from the lap belt, pull upward on
to allow the seat belt to go around the child’s lap.
the shoulder portion of the seat belt.
2
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
9. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the 2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
buckle.
way back?
WARNING!
Securely lock the seat cushion into position before
using the seat. Otherwise, the seat will not provide the
proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
improperly latched seat cushion could cause serious
injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over
the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback,
should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step
test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat belt
alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the
belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face
or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle.
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm
or behind their back.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
LATCH –
Lower Anchors
Seat Belt + Top
Lower Anchors
Seat Belt Only
+ Top Tether
Tether Anchor
Only
Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
X
2
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
2
Lower Anchor / Top Tether Locations
•
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Child Restraint LATCH Positions
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the
child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat
belt be used together to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint?
Can two child restraints be attached using
a common lower LATCH anchorage?
No
No
Use the LATCH anchorage system until
the combined weight of the child and the
child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the
seat belt and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined weight
is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint.
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with
two or more child restraints. If the center
position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next
to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front
passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more information.
The head restraints in the second row are
removable.
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
Latch Anchorages
2
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
In addition, there are tether strap anchors lo- Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
cated behind each rear seatback, near to the anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
floor.
rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
Center Seat LATCH
Tether Strap Anchors
This vehicle has 5 lower LATCH anchorages in the rear
seat. Anchorages A and B are used for the right outboard
position behind the front passenger (1). Anchorages D
and E are used for the left outboard position behind the
driver (3). Anchorages B and C are used for the center
seating position (2). Do not install a LATCH-compatible
child restraint using anchorages C and D. This is not a
LATCH-compatible position in your vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
You can install up to two child seats using the LATCH Options for installing two child seats using the LATCH
system at the same time. If you are installing three child anchorages in this vehicle:
restraints, you must use the seatbelt to install the center
1. Right and left outboard seating positions (1 and 3):
child restraint. You can use either the LATCH anchors for
Install the child seats in the right and left outboard
positions (1) and (3) or the vehicle’s seat belt for installing
seating positions using lower anchorages A and B, and
the child seats in the outboard positions.
D and E. Do not use the center seat anchorage, C. If the
child seats do not block the center seat belt webbing and
buckle, the center seat belt can be used to restraint an
occupant or child restraint in the center seating position.
2. Left outboard and center seating positions (3 and 2):
Install the first child seat in the left outboard seating
position using lower anchorages D and E. Install the
second child seat using the center anchorages, B and C.
Do not use the outer anchorage closest to the opposite
door, A. Do not use the remaining right outboard
seating position (1) for any occupant. The center child
restraint will block the seat belt buckle for this position.
2
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Use anchorages B and C to install a LATCHcompatible child restraint in the center seating
position (2). Do not install a LATCH-compatible
child restraint using anchorages C and D. This is
not a LATCH-compatible position in your vehicle.
• A child restraint installed in the center position (2)
will block the seat belt buckle for the empty right
outboard seating position (1). Do not use this seat
for another occupant.
• Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint.
• If you are installing three child restraints next to
each other, you must use the seat belt and the center
tether anchor for the center position. You can then
use either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat
belt for installing the child seats in the outboard
positions. Please refer to “Installing the LATCHCompatible Child Restraint System” for typical
installation instructions.
(Continued)
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
4. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat1. If the selected seating position has a Switchable Autoing position.
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt
following the instructions below. See the section “Install- 5. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
ing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
what type of seat belt each seating position has.
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor.
2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more 6. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
anchorages.
in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
3. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that
seating position. For some second row seats, you may 7. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
need to recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint to
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
in any direction.
rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You
may also move the front seat forward to allow more room
for the car seat.
To Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint
2
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching
other items or equipment to the vehicle.
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
used by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
the seatbelt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both types of
seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt
tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to
use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into
a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the
retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the
retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise
while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor. For
additional information on ALR, refer to the “Automatic
Locking Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints.”
The cinching latch plate is designed to hold the lap portion
of the seatbelt tight when webbing is pulled tight and
straight through a child restraint’s belt path. Please see the
following table(s) and the following sections for more information about both types of seat belts.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child
Restraints in this Vehicle
2
100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a
forward facing child restraint?
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Weight limit of the
Child Restraint
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten
the seat belt against the belt path of the
child restraint?
Yes
Yes
Always use the tether anchor when using
the seat belt to install a forward facing
child restraint, up to the recommended
weight limit of the child restraint.
Contact between the front passenger seat
and the child restraint is allowed, if the
child restraint manufacturer also allows
contact.
The head restraints in the second row are
removable.
In positions with cinching latch plates
(CINCH), the buckle stalk may be twisted
up to 3 full turns. Do not twist the buckle
stalk in a seating position with an ALR
retractor.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
Place the child seat in the center of the seating
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
the Automatic Locking mode.
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webrear-most position to make room for the child seat.
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
more room for the car seat.
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
vehicle seat.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
“click.”
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints
Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
against the child seat.
attach a tether anchor.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
1.
2.
3.
4.
2
102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by 2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
path.
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
“click.”
Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching
Latch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
vehicle seat.
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint to get 5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
rear-most position to make room for the child seat.
strap. Refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether
more room for the car seat.
anchor.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm) in
any direction.
If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the
buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn
the buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate
into the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child
restraint installation tight, try a different seating position.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the
belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have 1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, disconinstall the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
nect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
buckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
the latch plate into the buckle with the release button
tether anchorage for that seating position, move the
facing out, away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4
child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one
to 6, above, to complete the installation of the child
is available.
restraint.
2
104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and pass
the tether strap around the outboard side of the head
restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
Seat Track Release Lever
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for
the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your
vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints,
raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the
tether strap under the head restraint and between the two
Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child Transporting Pets
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
WARNING!
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to a collision.
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 mi (500 km). After
the initial 60 mi (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80
or 90 km/h) are desirable.
2
106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration, within the SAFETY TIPS
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Transporting Passengers
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detriNEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
mental and should be avoided.
AREA.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy-conserving type lubricant. Oil
WARNING!
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For • Do not leave children or animals inside parked
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vecause serious injury or death.
hicle”. NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL • It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
OILS MUST NEVER BE USED.
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
injured or killed.
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
considered a normal part of the break-in and not intervehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat
preted as an indication of difficulty.
belts.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107
WARNING! (Continued)
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• On seven passenger models, do not drive the
vehicle with the second row passenger seat in the
easy entry/exit position (seat cushion flipped upward and seat moved forward), as this position is
only intended for entering and exiting the third
row seats. Failure to follow this warning may result
in personal injury.
• On seven passenger models, do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row seat with the second row
seatback(s) folded flat. In a collision, the passenger
could slide underneath the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
(Continued)
2
108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
system.
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
system.
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 109
Air Bag Warning Light
The light should turn on and remain on for
four to six seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is
not lit during starting, or if the light stays on,
flickers, or turns on while driving, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel
the air directed against the windshield. See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to
prevent them from moving and interfering with the
pedals or the ability to control the vehicle.
(Continued)
2
110 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects
can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 111
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
2
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
▫ Uconnect® 4.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .119
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
▫ Uconnect® Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . .142
▫ Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped. . . . . . .122
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect® Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
▫ Manual Folding Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . .122
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .122
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . .123
䡵 Uconnect® PHONE (4.3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
䡵 Uconnect® PHONE (8.4/8.4N). . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
▫ Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
3
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
▫ Manual Front Seat Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . .205
▫ Uconnect® Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
▫ Recliner Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . .172
▫ Driver’s Seat Height Adjustment — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect® Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
䡵 VOICE COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
▫ Uconnect® 8.4/8.4 Nav . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
▫ Uconnect® Voice Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
▫ Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . .200
▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .202
▫ Fold-Flat Front Passenger Seat — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
▫ Third Row Passenger Seats — Seven Passenger
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
▫ 60/40 Split Second-Row Passenger Seats . . . . .214
▫ 50/50 Split Third-Row Passenger Seats With
Fold-Flat Feature — Seven Passenger Models . .221
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .223
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .226
▫ Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available with
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . .
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available with
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN .
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
. .232
. .233
. .234
. .235
. .236
. .236
. .236
. .238
3
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
▫ Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . . . . . .249
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
▫ ParkSense® System Usage Precautions. . . . . . .250
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 䡵 PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
▫ Turning ParkView® On Or Off — With
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Touchscreen Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
▫ Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
▫ Interior Observation Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
▫ Power Sunroof Switch — If Equipped . . . . . .
▫ ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . .
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® . . . . . . . .248
.252
.254
.254
.255
.256
.256
.257
.257
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . .259
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .262
▫ Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .263
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
▫ Using HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265 䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .271
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266 䡵 POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .275
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .267
▫ Power Inverter Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268 䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .269 䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .269
▫ Floor Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
3
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280 䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
▫ Flip ’n Stow™ Front Passenger Seat
Storage — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
▫ Rechargeable Flashlight — If Equipped . . . . . .285
▫ Cargo Management System .
▫ Second-Row Passenger Seat Temporary
䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES .
Storage Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer
▫ Second-Row Map Pocket And Grocery
Retainers — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .286
. . . . . . . . . . . . .291
. . . . . . . . . . . . .291
. . . . . . . . . . . . .293
▫ In-Floor Storage Bin With Removable Liner . . .283 䡵 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED . . . .294
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
Automatic
Dimming
Mirror — If Equipped
should be adjusted while the small control under the
mirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield). This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. This feature will be defaulted
on, and only be disabled when the vehicle is moving in
reverse.
3
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.
WARNING!
Automatic Dimming Mirror
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
Models Without Express Window Feature
Power Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s door Press the mirror select button marked L (left) or R (right)
trim panel.
and then press one of the four arrow buttons to move the
mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing.
Models With Express Window Feature
Press and release the mirror select button marked L (left)
or R (right) and then press one of the four arrow buttons
to move the mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing.
The selection times out after 30 seconds of inactivity in
order to guard against accidentally changing a mirror
position following an adjustment.
NOTE: A light in the selected button will illuminate
indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
Power Mirror Switches
3
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped
• The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located
between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).
Press the switch once and the mirrors will fold in,
pressing the switch a second time will return the mirrors
to the normal driving position.
• The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving speeds.
To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and unfold them
by pressing the button. (This may require multiple button
pushes). This resets them to their normal position.
Manual Folding Mirrors — If Equipped
NOTE: If the vehicle speed is greater than 10 mph
Some models have exterior mirrors that are hinged. The
(16 km/h) the folding feature will be disabled.
hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to
If the mirrors are in the folded position, and vehicle
resist damage. The hinge has three detent positions:
speed is equal or greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), they
forward, rearward and normal.
will automatically unfold.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
Resetting the Power Folding Outside Mirrors
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the
following occurs:
• The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding.
• The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/unfolded.
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear
Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
Sun Visor “Slide-On Rod” Feature — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use This feature allows for additional flexibility in positionthe mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the ing the visor to block out the sun.
mirror cover upward. The light will turn on automati1. Fold down the sun visor.
cally. Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to
extend it.
Uconnect® PHONE (4.3)
Uconnect® 4.3
Uconnect® Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, invehicle communications system. Uconnect® Phone allows you to dial a phone number with your mobile
phone.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
3
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect® Phone supports the following features:
Screen Activated Features:
Voice Activated Features:
• Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen,
• Hands Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith Mo- • Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks disbile” or, “Dial 248–555–1212”),
played on the touchscreen,
• Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”),
• Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so they are
easily accessible on the Main Phone screen,
• Calling Back the last incoming call number (“Call
Back”),
• Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs,
• View Call logs on screen (“Show incoming calls,” • Listen to Music on your Bluetooth® Device via the
“Show Outgoing calls,” “Show missed Calls,” “Show
touchscreen,
Recent Calls”),
• Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy access
• Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for John
to connect to them quickly.
Smith Mobile”).
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your
vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically
mute your radio when using the Uconnect® Phone.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
For Uconnect® Customer Support:
• U.S. residents – visit www.UconnectPhone.com or call
1–877–855–8400.
• Canadian Residents - visit www.UconnectPhone.com
or call, 1–800–465–2001 (English) or 1–800–387–9983
(French).
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your attention should be focused on safely operating the
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
If your mobile phone only supports the Headset Profile
you may not be able to use any Uconnect® Phone The Uconnect® Phone is driven through your Bluetooth®
features. Refer to your mobile service provider or the “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect® features
phone manufacturer for details.
Bluetooth® technology - the global standard that enables
Uconnect® Phone allows you to transfer calls between different electronic devices to connect to each other without
the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit wires or a docking station, so Uconnect® Phone works no
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s matter where you stow your mobile phone (be it your purse,
pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is turned on and
microphone for private conversation.
has been paired to the vehicle’s Uconnect® Phone.
3
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The Uconnect® Phone allows up to ten mobile phones or
audio devices to be linked to the system. Only one linked (or
paired) mobile phone and one audio device can be used with
the system at a time. The system is available in English,
Spanish, or French languages.
The Uconnect® Phone is fully integrated with the vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect® Phone
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
switch), if so equipped.
Uconnect® Phone Button
Operation
The Uconnect® Phone
Button is used to
enter the phone mode and make calls, show
recent, incoming, outgoing calls, view phonebook etc., When you press the button you will
hear a BEEP. The beep is your signal to give a command.
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect®
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect® Phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
Uconnect® Phone prompts. There are two general methods for how Voice Command works:
Uconnect® Voice Command Button
1. Say compound commands like “Call John Smith mobile.”
Button is
The Uconnect® Voice Command
only used for “barge in” and when you are 2. Say the individual commands and allow the system to
guide you to complete the task.
already in a call and you want to send Tones or
make another call.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
You will be prompted for a specific command and then
guided through the available options.
works best when you talk in a normal conversational
tone, as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/
meters away from you.
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt or another Natural Speech
prompt.
Your Uconnect® Phone Voice system uses a Natural
• For certain operations, compound commands can be Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine.
used. For example, instead of saying “Call” and then
Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in
“John Smith” and then “mobile,” the following comphrases or complete sentences. The system filters out
pound command can be said: “Call John Smith mobile.”
certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah”
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the and “eh.” The system handles fill-in words such as “I
compound command form of the voice command is would like to.”
given. You can also break the commands into parts and The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or
say each part of the command when you are asked for sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly Smith.”
it. For example, you can use the compound command For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence, the
form voice command “Search for John Smith,” or you system identifies the topic or context and provides the
can break the compound command form into two associated follow-up prompt such as “Who do you want to
voice commands: “Search Contact” and when asked call?” in the case where a phone call was requested but the
“John Smith.” Please remember, the Uconnect® Phone specific name was not recognized.
3
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the system Cancel Command
requires more information from the user it will ask a At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
question to which the user can respond without pressing you will be returned to the main menu.
button on your steering wheel.
the Voice Command
or
button on your steering
You can also press the
Voice Command Tree
wheel when the system is listening for a command and
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
be returned to the main or previous menu.
Help Command
Pair (Link) Uconnect® Phone To A Mobile Phone
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to To begin using your Uconnect® Phone, you must pair
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following your compatible Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone.
the beep.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference
To activate the Uconnect® Phone from idle, simply press your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The Uconnect® webbutton on your steering wheel and say a com- site may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
the
mand or say “help.” All Uconnect® Phone sessions begin
button on the radio control head.
with a press of the
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
NOTE:
2. At the “Paired Phones” screen press the “Add Device”
soft-key and a pop-up with instructions will appear.
• You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your phone to
3. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth® encomplete this procedure.
abled mobile phone. When prompted on the phone,
• The vehicle must be in PARK.
select the “Uconnect®” device and enter the PIN.
1. You can do either of the following:
4. When the pairing process has successfully completed,
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
a. Press the “Settings” hard-key, page down to the
“Phone/Bluetooth®” soft-key, press it and you will
this is your favorite phone. Selecting “Yes” will make
this phone the highest priority. This phone will take
see the “Paired Phones” screen. If there are no
precedence over other paired phones within range.
paired phones you will see <Empty> as the first
device name.
Pair A Bluetooth® Streaming Audio Device
b. Press the MORE hard-key, then press the Phone
1. Touch the “Player” hard-key to begin.
soft-key and you will go to the Uconnect® Phone
main screen. Press the “Settings” soft-key. If there 2. Press the “Source” soft-key.
are no phones currently paired a pop-up will
3. Change the Source to Bluetooth®.
appear. If you select “Yes” you will go the “Paired
Phones” screen, if you select “No” you will return 4. Touch the “Add Device” soft-key.
to the Uconnect® Phone main menu.
3
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
5. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth® en- Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
abled Audio Device. When prompted on the device, Audio Device
select the “Uconnect®” device and enter the PIN.
Uconnect® Phone will automatically connect to the high6. Uconnect® Phone will display an in process screen est priority paired phone and/or Audio Device within
range. If you would need to choose a particular Phone or
while the system is connecting.
Audio Device follow these steps:
7. When the pairing process has successfully completed,
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not 1. Touch the “Settings” hard-key,
this is your favorite device. Selecting Yes will make 2. Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth®” soft-key,
this device the highest priority. This device will take
3. Touch to select the particular Phone or the “Phone/
precedence over other paired devices within range.
Audio” soft-key and then an Audio Device,
NOTE: If No is selected, device priority is determined by
the order in which it was paired. The latest device paired 4. At the Options pop-up screen touch the “Connect
Device” soft-key,
will have the higher priority.
You can also use the following VR command to bring up 5. Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
a list of paired audio devices.
• “Show Paired Audio Devices.”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device
1. Touch the “Settings” hard-key.
2. Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth®” soft-key.
3. Select the Phone or Audio Device.
4. At the Options pop-up screen touch the “Delete Device” soft-key.
5. Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite
1. Touch the “Settings” hard-key.
4. At the Options pop-up screen touch the “Disconnect
2. Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth®” soft-key.
Device” soft-key.
5. Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device
3. Select a different Phone or Audio Device then the
currently connected device.
2. Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth®” soft-key.
4. At the Options pop-up screen touch the “Make Favorite” soft-key; you will see the chosen device move to
the top of the list.
3. Select the Phone or Audio Device.
5. Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
1. Touch the “Settings” hard-key.
3
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Phonebook Download (Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone) – If Equipped
• A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected
to the Uconnect® Phone.
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
Uconnect® Phone automatically downloads names (text • Depending on the maximum number of entries downnames) and number entries from the mobile phone’s
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phone
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if availBook Access Profile may support this feature. See
able, the previously downloaded phonebook is availUconnect® website, www.UconnectPhone.com, for supable for use.
ported phones.
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
• To call a name from a downloaded mobile phone book,
phone is accessible.
follow the procedure in the Voice Recognition Quick
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
Reference section.
deleted on the Uconnect® Phone. These can only be
• Automatic download and update of a phone book, if
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are transsupported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless
ferred and updated to Uconnect® Phone on the next
phone connection is made to the Uconnect® Phone, for
phone connection.
example, after you start the vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the Uconnect® Phone. Check with your
The 911/Help numbers can only be altered. These can not
mobile service provider for the features that you have.
be deleted or the names can not be changed.
Ways To Initiate A Phone Call
To change the 911/Help number follow these steps.
Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call
1. Touch the “phonebook” soft-key from the Phone main
with Uconnect® Phone.
screen.
• Redial,
2. Touch the “911/Help” soft-key. Touch the appropriate
• Dial by touching in the number,
listing to alter, Emergency for example.
Emergency And Towing Assistance
3. Once Emergency is touched, the Edit soft-key appears. • Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Number, Call by
Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial, or Call Back),
Touch the “Edit” soft-key and you will be given the
choice to Edit Number or Reset to Default.
• Mobile Phonebook,
4. Follow the on-screen prompts to complete the task.
• Recent Call Log.
Phone Call Features
NOTE: All of the above operations except Redial can be
The following features can be accessed through the done with one call or less active.
Uconnect® Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service
3
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Dial By Saying A Number
Call Controls
1. Press the
The touchscreen allows you to control the following call
features:
button to begin.
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
• Answer
say “Dial 248-555-1212.”
3. The Uconnect® Phone will dial 248-555-1212.
• End
Call By Saying A Phonebook Name
• Ignore
1. Press the
• Hold/unhold
button on your steering wheel to begin,
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep, •
say “Call John Doe Mobile,”
•
3. The Uconnect® Phone will dial the number associated
•
with John Doe, or if there are multiple numbers it will
•
ask which number you want to call for John Doe.
Mute/unmute
Transfer the call to/from the phone
Swap two active calls
Join two active calls together
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
Touch-Tone Number Entry
• Missed Calls
1. Touch the “Phone” soft-key.
• All Calls
2. Touch the “Dial” soft-key.
These can be accessed by touching the recent calls
soft-key on the Phone main screen.
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
You can also press the
button and say “Show my
4. Use the numbered soft-keys to enter the number and
incoming calls” from any screen and the Incoming calls
touch “Call.”
will be displayed.
To send a touch tone using Voice Recognition (VR), press
button while in a call and say “1234#” or you NOTE: Incoming can also be replaced with “Outgoing”,
the
can say “Send Voicemail Password” if Voicemail pass- “Recent” or “Missed.”
word is stored in your mobile phonebook.
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
Recent Calls
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
You may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the
Uconnect® Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sysfollowing call types:
tem, if on, and will display a pop-up showing Answer or
• Incoming Calls
button on the
Ignore. Press the Answer soft-key or the
steering wheel to accept the call.
• Outgoing Calls
3
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for call
waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile
phone. Uconnect® Phone will then interrupt the vehicle
audio system, if on, and will display a pop-up showing
button to place
Answer, Ignore or Transfer. Press the
the current call on hold and answer the incoming call.
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed
press the
by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to
call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is
in progress. Or you can place a call on hold by touching
the “Hold” soft-key on the Phone main screen, then dial
a number from the dialpad, recent calls or from the
phonebooks. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling
NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone compatible phones in the
Between Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
to “Join Calls” in this section.
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
Toggling Between Calls
Redial
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), 1. Press the “Redial” soft-key,
button until you hear a single beep, indicatpress the
button and after the “Listening”
ing that the active and hold status of the two calls have 2. or press the
prompt and the following beep, say “Redial.”
switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a time.
Also you can press the Swap soft-key on the Phone main 3. The Uconnect® Phone will call the last number that
screen.
was dialed from your mobile phone.
Join Calls
Call Continuation
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
hold), touch the “Join Calls” soft-key on the Phone main Uconnect® Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call.
switched to OFF.
Call Termination
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the End soft-key
or the
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated
and if there is a call on hold, it will become the new active
call. If the active call is terminated by the far end, a call on
hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
phone-dependent.
continue on the Uconnect® Phone either until the call
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
cessation of the call on the Uconnect® Phone and
transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
3
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect® Phone Features
NOTE:
• The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
reachable:
not be applicable with the available mobile service and
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
area.
number for your area.
• The Uconnect® Phone does slightly lower your
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect® Phone is
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
for the mobile phone directly.
follows:
Emergency Assistance
• Press the
button to begin,
• After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Emergency” and the Uconnect® Phone will instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency
number. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada,
and Mexico.
WARNING!
Your phone must be turned on and connected to the
Uconnect® Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature in
emergency situations, when the mobile phone has network coverage and stays connected to the Uconnect®
Phone.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
Roadside Assistance / Towing Assistance
Working With Automated Systems
If you need roadside/towing assistance:
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
• Press the
button to begin,
• After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
You can use your Uconnect® Phone to access a voice mail
say “Roadside Assistance” or say “Towing Assissystem or an automated service, such as a paging service
tance.”
or automated customer service line. Some services reNOTE: The roadside/towing assistance number dialed is quire immediate response selection. In some instances,
based on the country where the vehicle is purchased that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect® Phone.
(1-800-528-2069 for the U.S., 1-800-363-4869 for Canada,
When calling a number with your Uconnect® Phone that
55-14-3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outnormally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
side Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the Chrysler
on your mobile phone keypad, you can utilize the
Group LLC 24-Hour “Roadside Assistance” coverage
button and say the word
touchscreen or press the
details in the Warranty Information Booklet and on the
“Send” then the sequence you wish to enter. For example,
24-Hour Roadside Assistance Card.
if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7
Voice Mail Calling
button and say, “Send 3 7 4
4 6 #), you can press the
6
#.”
Saying
“Send”
followed
by
a number, or sequence of
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
with Automated Systems.”
3
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
numbers, is also to be used for navigating through an • Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
automated customer service center menu structure, and
use of this feature.
to leave a number on a pager.
You can also send stored mobile phonebook entries as
tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. For example, if you previously created a Phonebook entry and/or Last Name as “Voice Password,” then
button and say “Send Voicemail
if you press the
Password,” the Uconnect® Phone will then send the
corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as tones over the phone.
• Pauses, wait or other characters that are supported by
some phones are not supported over Bluetooth®.
These additional symbols will be ignored when dialing
a numbered sequence.
Barge In — Overriding Prompts
The
button can be used when you wish to skip part
of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately.
For example, if a prompt is asking “There are two
NOTE:
numbers with the name John. Say the full name” you
button and say, “John Smith” to
• The first number encountered for that contact will be could press the
select
that
option
without
having to listen to the rest of
sent. All other numbers entered for that contact will be
the
voice
prompt.
ignored.
• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
network configurations. This is normal.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
Voice Response Length
It is possible for you to choose between Brief and
Detailed Voice Response Length.
1. Touch the “More” hard-key, then touch the “Settings”
soft-key.
2. Touch the “Display” soft-key, then scroll down to
Voice Response Length.
3. Select either “Brief” or “Detailed” by touching the box
next to the selection. A check-mark will appear to
show your selection.
Phone And Network Status Indicators
Uconnect® Phone will provide notification to inform you
of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect® Phone. The
status is given for network signal strength and phone
battery strength.
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
WARNING!
Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Chrysler Group LLC
strongly recommends that you use extreme caution
when using any device or feature that may take your
focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any handheld device while driving, encourage the use of voice-operated systems
when possible and that you become aware of applicable laws that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
3
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
keypad and still use the Uconnect® Phone (while dialing
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your connected Bluetooth® mobile phone, the audio will be played through your
vehicle’s audio system. The Uconnect® Phone will work
the same as if you dial the number using voice a
command.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the Uconnect® Phone to play it on the vehicle
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situation, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
that the call did not go through even though the call is in
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the
audio.
The Uconnect® Phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect® Phone
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your connected mobile phone to the Uconnect®
Phone or vice versa, press the Transfer button on the
Phone main screen.
When you mute the Uconnect® Phone, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the Uconnect® Phone simply touch the
“Mute” button on the Phone main screen.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between the
Uconnect® Phone And Mobile Phone
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a Voice Command period.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth® • Performance is maximized under:
connection between a Uconnect® Phone paired mobile
• low-to-medium blower setting,
phone and the Uconnect® Phone, follow the instructions
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
described in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
• low road noise,
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect®
• smooth road surface,
Phone
• fully closed windows,
Voice Command
• dry weather condition.
• For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to • Even though the system is designed for users speaking
provide at least ½ in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
in North American English, French, and Spanish acconsole (if equipped) and the mirror.
cents, the system may not always work for some.
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
• Speak normally without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
3
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• When navigating through an automated system such • Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred.”
speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send.”
• You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
• Even though international dialing for most number
not in motion is recommended.
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding names
number combinations may not be supported.
in the Uconnect® Phonebook.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
• Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect® Phone Locompromised with the convertible top down.
cal) name recognition rate is optimized when the
entries are not similar.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
Far End Audio Performance
• Audio quality is maximized under:
• Low-To-Medium Blower Setting.
• Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed.
• Low Road Noise.
• Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Bluetooth® Communication Link
• Dry Weather Conditions, And
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect® Phone. When this happens, the connection
can generally be reestablished by switching the phone
off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in
Bluetooth® ON mode.
• Operation From The Driver’s Seat.
Power-Up
• Smooth Road Surface.
• Fully Closed Windows.
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.
not the Uconnect® Phone.
3
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Tree
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
NOTE:
• You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone
number supported by your Mobile phone.
• You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your
mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send • You can replace “4” with any message number shown
a message to John Smith” and the system will ask you
on the screen.
which phone number you want to send a message to
• If your phone does not support phonebook download
for John Smith.
or call log download over Bluetooth® than these
• You can replace “Mobile” with “Home,” “Work” or
commands will return a response that the contact does
“Other.”
not exist in the phonebook.
• You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing • Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and
Calls” or “Missed Calls.”
underlined in the gray shaded boxes.
• Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect®
system is equipped with this feature and the mobile
phone supports messaging over Bluetooth®.
3
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
Uconnect® PHONE (8.4/8.4N)
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4N
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
Uconnect® Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, infollowing conditions:
vehicle communications system. Uconnect® Phone al• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile
the party responsible for compliance could void the phone.
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Uconnect® Phone supports the following features:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
Voice Activated Features:
• This device must accept any interference received, • Hands Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith Moincluding interference that may cause undesired opbile” or, “Dial 248 555 1212”).
eration.
• Hands Free text to speech listening of your incoming
SMS messages.
• Hands Free text messaging (“Send a message to John
Smith Mobile”).
• Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
• Calling Back the last incoming call number (“Call •
Back”).
•
• View Call logs on screen (“Show incoming calls”,
“Show Outgoing calls”, “Show missed Calls”, “Show
•
Recent Calls”).
Sending a text message via the touchscreen.
Listen to Music on your Bluetooth® Device via the
touchscreen.
Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy access
to connect to them quickly.
• Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for John
NOTE: Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging
Smith Mobile”).
via Bluetooth® for messaging features to work properly.
Screen Activated Features
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your
vehicles audio system; the system will automatically
• Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen.
mute your radio when using the Uconnect® Phone. For
• Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks dis- Uconnect® customer support, visit the following webplayed on the touchscreen.
site:
• Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so they are • U.S. residents - visit www.UconnectPhone.com or call
easily accessible on the Main Phone screen.
1–877–855–8400.
• Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs.
• Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS.
• Canadian residents - visit www.UconnectPhone.com
or call 1–800–465–2001 (English) or 1–800–387–9983
(French).
3
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect® Phone allows you to transfer calls between
the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s
microphone for private conversation.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your attention should be focused on safely operating the
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in an accident
causing serious injury or death.
wires or a docking station, so Uconnect® Phone works no
matter where you stow your mobile phone (be it your purse,
pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is turned on and
has been paired to the vehicle’s Uconnect® Phone. The
Uconnect® Phone allows up to ten mobile phones or audio
devices to be linked to the system. Only one linked (or
paired) mobile phone and one audio device can be used with
the system at a time. The system is available in English,
Spanish, or French languages.
Uconnect® Phone Button
Button is used to
The Uconnect® Phone
enter the phone mode and make calls, show
recent, incoming, outgoing calls, view phoneThe Uconnect® Phone is driven through your Bluetooth®
book etc., When you press the button you will
“Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect® features
hear a BEEP. The beep is your signal to give a command.
Bluetooth® technology - the global standard that enables
different electronic devices to connect to each other without
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
Uconnect® Voice Command Button
Button is
The Uconnect® Voice Command
only used for “barge in” and when you are
already in a call and you want to send Tones or
make another call.
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect®
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect® Phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
Uconnect® Phone prompts. There are two general methbutton is also used to access the Voice Com- ods for how Voice Command works:
The
mands for the Uconnect® Voice Command features if 1. Say compound commands like “Call John Smith moyour vehicle is equipped. Please see the Uconnect® Voice
bile.”
Command section for direction on how to use the
2. Say the individual commands and allow the system to
button.
guide you to complete the task.
The Uconnect® Phone is fully integrated with the vehicles audio system. The volume of the Uconnect® Phone You will be prompted for a specific command and then
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control guided through the available options.
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right • Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
switch), if so equipped.
beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt or another
prompt.
3
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying “Call” and then
“John Smith” and then “mobile”, the following compound command can be said: “Call John Smith mobile.”
Natural Speech
Your Uconnect® Phone Voice system uses a Natural
Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine.
Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in
phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah”
compound command form of the voice command is and “eh.” The system handles fill-in words such as “I
given. You can also break the commands into parts and would like to.”
say each part of the command when you are asked for
it. For example, you can use the compound command The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase
form voice command “Search for John Smith,” or you or sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly
can break the compound command form into two Smith.” For multiple inputs in the same phrase or senvoice commands: “Search Contact” and when asked tence, the system identifies the topic or context and
“John Smith.” Please remember, the Uconnect® Phone provides the associated follow-up prompt such as “Who
works best when you talk in a normal conversational do you want to call?” in the case where a phone call was
tone, as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/ requested but the specific name was not recognized.
meters away from you.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the system Cancel Command
requires more information from the user it will ask a At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
question to which the user can respond without pressing you will be returned to the main menu.
button on your steering wheel.
the Voice Command
or
button on your steering
You can also press the
Voice Command Tree
wheel when the system is listening for a command and
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
be returned to the main or previous menu.
Help Command
Pair (Link) Uconnect® Phone To A Mobile Phone
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to To begin using your Uconnect® Phone, you must pair
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following your compatible Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone.
the beep.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference
To activate the Uconnect® Phone from idle, simply press your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The Uconnect® webbutton on your steering wheel and say a com- site may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
the
mand or say “help.” All Uconnect® Phone sessions begin
NOTE:
button on the radio control head.
with a press of the
• You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your phone to
complete this procedure.
• The vehicle must be in PARK.
3
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
1. Press the “Phone” soft-key on the screen to begin.
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process. Then, search
for available devices on your Bluetooth® enabled
2. If there is no phone currently connected with the
mobile phone. When prompted on the phone, enter
system, a pop-up will appear.
the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect® screen.
• If “No” is selected, touch the “Settings” soft-key
from the Uconnect® Phone main screen,
• Touch the “Add Device” soft-key,
• Search for available devices on your Bluetooth®
enabled mobile phone. When prompted on the
phone, enter the name and PIN shown on the
Uconnect® screen,
• See step 4 to complete the process.
4. Uconnect® Phone will display an in progress screen
while the system is connecting.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
Pair Additional Mobile Phones
1. Touch the “Settings” soft-key from the Phone main
screen,
2. Touch the “Add Device” soft-key,
3. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone. When prompted on the phone,
enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect®
screen,
4. Uconnect® Phone will display an in process screen
while the system is connecting,
5. When the pairing process has successfully completed,
5. When the pairing process has successfully completed,
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
this is your favorite phone. Selecting Yes will make
this is your favorite phone. Selecting Yes will make
this phone the highest priority. This phone will take
this phone the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within range.
precedence over other paired phones within range.
3
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For phones which are not made a favorite, the NOTE: If there is no device currently connected with the
phone priority is determined by the order in which it was system, a pop-up will appear.
paired. The latest phone paired will have the higher
5. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth® enpriority.
abled audio device. When prompted on the device,
You can also use the following VR commands to bring up
enter the PIN shown on the Uconnect® screen,
the Paired Phone screen from any screen on the radio:
6. Uconnect® Phone will display an in process screen
• “Show Paired Phones” or
while the system is connecting,
• “Connect My Phone”
Pair A Bluetooth® Streaming Audio Device
1. Touch the “Player” soft-key to begin,
2. Change the Source to Bluetooth®,
7. When the pairing process has successfully completed,
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
this is your favorite device. Selecting Yes will make
this device the highest priority. This device will take
precedence over other paired devices within range.
NOTE: For devices which are not made a favorite, the
3. Touch the “Bluetooth®” soft-key to display the Paired
device priority is determined by the order in which it was
Audio Devices screen,
paired. The latest device paired will have the higher
4. Touch the “Add Device” soft-key,
priority.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
You can also use the following VR command to bring up Disconnecting A Phone or Audio Device
a list of paired audio devices:
1. Touch the “Settings” soft-key,
• “Show Paired Phones”
2. Touch the paired phone or audio device soft-key,
• “Connect My Phone”
3. Touch the + soft-key located to the right of the device
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
name,
Audio Device After Pairing
4. The options pop-up will be displayed,
Uconnect® Phone will automatically connect to the highest priority paired phone and/or Audio Device within 5. Touch the “Disconnect Device” soft-key,
range. If you need to choose a particular phone or Audio 6. Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
Device follow these steps:
Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device
1. Touch the “Settings” soft-key,
1. Touch the “Settings” soft-key,
2. Touch the paired phone or audio device soft-key,
2. Touch the pair phone or audio device soft-key,
3. Touch to select the particular Phone or the “Paired
3. Touch the + soft-key located to the right of the device
Audio Sources” soft-key and then an Audio Device,
name for a different Phone or Audio Device than the
4. Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
currently connected device,
3
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. The options pop-up will be displayed,
5. Touch the “Delete Device” soft-key,
6. Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite
1. Touch the “Settings” soft-key,
2. Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth®” soft-key,
Phonebook Download (Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone) – If Equipped
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
Uconnect® Phone automatically downloads names (text
names) and number entries from the mobile phone’s
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phone
Book Access Profile may support this feature. See
Uconnect® website, www.UconnectPhone.com, for supported phones.
3. Touch the + soft-key located to the right of the device
• To call a name from a downloaded mobile phone book,
name,
follow the procedure in the Voice Recognition Quick
4. The options pop-up will be displayed,
Reference section.
5. Touch the “Make Favorite” soft-key; you will see the
• Automatic download and update of a phone book, if
chosen device move to the top of the list,
supported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless
phone connection is made to the Uconnect® Phone, for
6. Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
example, after you start the vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
• A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down- Managing Your Favorite Phonebook
loaded and updated every time a phone is connected There are three ways you can add an entry to your
to the Uconnect® Phone.
Favorite Phonebook.
• Depending on the maximum number of entries down- 1. During an active call of a number to make a favorite,
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
touch and hold a favorite button on the top of the
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if availphone main screen.
able, the previously downloaded phonebook is avail2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select phoneable for use.
book from the Phone main screen, then select the
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
appropriate number. Touch the + next to the selected
phone is accessible.
number to display the options pop-up. In the pop-up
select “Add to Favorites.”
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the Uconnect® Phone. These can only be
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are transferred and updated to Uconnect® Phone on the next
phone connection.
3
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
the + on that selected entry. When the Options pop-up
appears, touch “Add from Mobile.” You will then be
asked which contact and number to choose from your
mobile phonebook. When complete the new favorite
will be shown.
NOTE: If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
remove an existing favorite.
3. From the Phone main screen, select phonebook. From
the phonebook screen, select the “Favorites” soft-key
and then select the + soft-key located to the right of the
phonebook record. Select an empty entry and touch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
To Remove A Favorite
1. To remove a Favorite, select phonebook from the
Phone main screen.
2. Next select Favorites on the left side of the screen and
then touch the + Options soft-key.
3
3. Touch the + next to the Favorite you would like to
remove.
4. The Options pop-up will display, touch “Remove from
Favs.”
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Emergency And Towing Assistance
The Emergency and Towing Assistance Favorite numbers
can only be altered. These cannot be deleted and the
names cannot be changed.
To change the Emergency or Towing Assistance numbers
follow these steps.
1. Touch the “Phonebook” soft-key from the Phone main
screen.
2. Touch the “Favorites” soft-key. Scroll to the bottom of
the list to locate the Emergency and Towing Assistance
Favorites.
5. The Options pop-up will appear and you can choose
between Editing the number or resetting the number
3. Touch the + Options soft-key.
to default.
4. Touch the + next to appropriate Favorite that is to be
altered.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
Phone Call Features
• Mobile Phonebook
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect® Phone if the feature(s) are available and
supported by Bluetooth® on your mobile service plan.
For example, if your mobile service plan provides threeway calling, this feature can be accessed through the
Uconnect® Phone. Check with your mobile service provider for the features that you have.
• Recent Call Log
Ways To Initiate A Phone Call
• SMS Message Viewer
Dial By Saying A Number
1. Press the
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Dial 151 1234 5555,”
Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call 3. The Uconnect® Phone will dial
151–1234–5555.
with Uconnect® Phone.
Call By Saying A Phonebook Name
• Redial
• Dial by touching in the number
3
button to begin,
1. Press the
the
number
button on your steering wheel to begin,
• Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call by 2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Call John Doe Mobile,”
Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial, or Call Back)
• Favorites
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. The Uconnect® Phone will dial the number associated Touch-Tone Number Entry
with John Doe, or if there are multiple numbers it will
1. Touch the “Phone” soft-key,
ask which number you want to call for John Doe.
2. Touch the “Dial” soft-key,
Call Controls
The touchscreen allows you to control the following call 3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed,
features:
• Answer
• End
• Ignore
• Hold/unhold
• Mute/unmute
• Transfer the call to/from the phone
• Swap two active calls
• Join two active calls together
4. Use the numbered soft-keys to enter the number and
touch “Call.”
To send a touch tone using Voice Recognition (VR), press
button on your steering wheel while in a call
the
and say “Send 1234#” or you can say “Send Voicemail
Password” if Voicemail password is stored in your mobile phonebook.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
Recent Calls
• Missed Calls
You may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the • All Calls
following call types:
These can be accessed by touching the “recent calls”
soft-key on the Phone main screen.
button and say “Show my
You can also press the
incoming calls” from any screen and the Incoming calls
will be displayed.
button and say “Show my
You can also press the
recent calls” from any screen and the All calls screen will
be displayed.
NOTE: Incoming can also be replaced with “Outgoing,”
“Recent” or “Missed.”
• Incoming Calls
• Outgoing Calls
3
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
Uconnect® Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sysbutton to accept the call. You can also
tem. Press the
touch the “answer” soft-key or touch the caller ID box.
You can place a call on hold by touching the Hold
soft-key on the Phone main screen, then dial a number
from the dialpad, recent calls, SMS Inbox or from the
phonebooks. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling
Between Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer
to “Join Calls” in this section.
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
button, answer softmobile phone. Press the phone
key or caller ID box to place the current call on hold and
answer the incoming call.
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
During an active call, touch the “Hold” soft-key on the
Phone main screen.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
touch the “Swap” soft-key on the Phone main screen.
NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone compatible phones in the
Only one call can be placed on hold at a time.
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
button to toggle between the
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can You can also press the
active
and
held
phone
call.
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
Join Calls
Call Continuation
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
hold), touch the “Join Calls” soft-key on the Phone main Uconnect® Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call.
switched to OFF.
NOTE: The call will remain within the vehicle audio
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
but- system until the phone becomes out of range for the
ton or the end soft-key. Only the active call(s) will be Bluetooth® connection. It is recommended to press the
terminated and if there is a call on hold, it will become “transfer” soft-key when leaving the vehicle.
the new active call.
Uconnect® Phone Features
Call Termination
Redial
Emergency Assistance
Press the “Redial” soft-key, or press the
and after the If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
“Listening” prompt and the following beep, say “Re- reachable:
dial.”
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
The Uconnect® Phone will call the last number that was
number for your area.
dialed from your mobile phone.
3
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect® Phone is • The Uconnect® Phone does slightly lower your
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
for the mobile phone directly.
follows:
1. Press the
button to begin.
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Dial Emergency” and the Uconnect® Phone will
instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency
number. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada,
and Mexico.
NOTE:
WARNING!
Your phone must be turned on and connected to the
Uconnect® Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature in
emergency situations, when the mobile phone has network coverage and stays connected to the Uconnect®
Phone.
Roadside Assistance / Towing Assistance
• The Emergency call may also be initiated by using the
If you need roadside/towing assistance:
touchscreen.
button to begin.
• The emergency number dialed is based on the country 1. Press the
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and 2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
say “Roadside Assistance” or say “Towing Assistance.”
not be applicable with the available mobile service and
area.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
NOTE: The roadside/towing assistance number dialed is
based on the country where the vehicle is purchased
(1-800-528-2069 for the U.S., 1-800-363-4869 for Canada,
55-14-3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the Chrysler
Group LLC 24-Hour “Roadside Assistance” coverage
details in the Warranty Information Booklet and on the
24-Hour Roadside Assistance Card.
You can use your Uconnect® Phone to access a voice mail
system or an automated service, such as a paging service
or automated customer service line. Some services require immediate response selection. In some instances,
that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect® Phone.
When calling a number with your Uconnect® Phone that
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
on your mobile phone keypad, you can utilize the
touchscreen or press the
Voice Mail Calling
button and say the word
“Send”
then
the
sequence
you
wish
to enter. For example,
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
if
required
to
enter
your
PIN
followed
with a pound, (3 7
with Automated Systems.”
button and say, “Send 3 7 4
4 6 #), you can press the
Working With Automated Systems
6 #.” Saying “Send” followed by a number, or sequence of
This method is used in instances where one generally has numbers, is also to be used for navigating through an
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while automated customer service center menu structure, and
to leave a number on a pager.
navigating through an automated telephone system.
3
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
You can also send stored mobile phonebook entries as • Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
use of this feature.
entries. For example, if you previously created a Phonebook entry with First and/or Last Name as “Voicemail
• Pauses, wait or other characters that are supported by
button and say
Password”, then if you press the
some phones are not supported over Bluetooth®.
“Send Voicemail Password” the Uconnect® Phone will
These additional symbols will be ignored in the dialing
then send the corresponding phone number associated
a numbered sequence.
with the phonebook entry, as tones over the phone.
Barge In — Overriding Prompts
NOTE:
The
button can be used when you wish to skip part
• The first number encountered for that contact will be of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately.
sent. All other numbers entered for that contact will be For example, if a prompt is asking “There are two
ignored.
numbers with the name John. Say the full name” you
button and say, “John Smith” to
• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone could press the
select
that
option
without
having to listen to the rest of
network configurations. This is normal.
the voice prompt.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
Voice Response Length
It is possible for you to choose between Brief and
Detailed Voice Response Length.
1. Touch the “More” soft-key (where available), then
touch the “Settings” soft-key,
2. Touch the “Display” soft-key, then scroll down to
Voice Response Length,
3. Select either “Brief” or “Detailed” by touching the box
next to the selection. A check-mark will appear to
show your selection.
Phone And Network Status Indicators
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
WARNING!
Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Chrysler Group LLC
strongly recommends that you use extreme caution
when using any device or feature that may take your
focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any handheld device while driving, encourage the use of voice-operated systems
when possible and that you become aware of applicable laws that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
Uconnect® Phone will provide notification to inform you
of your phone and network status when you are attemptYou can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
ing to make a phone call using Uconnect® Phone. The
keypad and still use the Uconnect® Phone (while dialing
status is given for network signal strength and phone
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
battery strength.
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
3
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
dialing a number with your connected Bluetooth® mobile phone, the audio will be played through your
vehicle’s audio system. The Uconnect® Phone will work
the same as if you dial the number using voice a
command.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect® Phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect® Phone
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the from your connected mobile phone to the Uconnect®
dial ring to the Uconnect® Phone to play it on the vehicle Phone or vice versa, press the Transfer button on the
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situa- Phone main screen.
tion, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
that the call did not go through even though the call is in Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the Uconnect® Phone And Mobile Phone
audio.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth®
connection between a Uconnect® Phone paired mobile
phone and the Uconnect® Phone, follow the instructions
When you mute the Uconnect® Phone, you will still be
described in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. To
mute the Uconnect® Phone simply touch the Mute
button on the Phone main screen.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute ON/OFF)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect®
Phone
• Low Road Noise.
• Smooth Road Surface.
Voice Command
• Fully Closed Windows.
• For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
• Dry Weather Condition.
provide at least ½ in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
Even though the system is designed for many languages
and accents, the system may not always work for some.
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
When navigating through an automated system such as
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would voice mail, or when sending a page, before speaking the
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from digit string, make sure to say “Send.”
you.
NOTE: It is recommended that you do not store names in
• Ensure that no one other than you is speaking during your favorites phonebook while the vehicle is in motion.
a voice command period.
Phonebook (Mobile and Favorites) name recognition rate
Performance is maximized under:
is optimized when the entries are not similar. You can say
“O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
• Low-To-Medium Blower Setting.
• Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed.
3
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Even though international dialing for most number com- Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness to
binations is supported, some shortcut dialing number a large degree rely on the phone and network, and not
the Uconnect® Phone.
combinations may not be supported.
Far End Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
• Low-To-Medium Blower Setting.
• Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed.
• Low Road Noise.
• Smooth Road Surface.
• Fully Closed Windows.
• Dry Weather Conditions, And
• Operation From The Driver’s Seat.
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect® Phone can read or send new messages on
your phone.
Your phone must support SMS over Bluetooth® in order
to use this feature. If the Uconnect® Phone determines
your phone is not compatible with SMS messaging over
Bluetooth® the “Messaging” button will be grayed out
and the feature will not be available for use.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
NOTE: Uconnect® Phone SMS is only available when the
vehicle is not moving.
3
Once a message is received and viewed or listened to,
you will have the following options:
Read Messages:
• Send a Reply
If you receive a new text message while your phone is • Forward
connected to Uconnect® Phone, an announcement will
be made to notify you that you have a new text message. • Call
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Send Messages Using Soft-Keys:
You can send messages using Uconnect® Phone. To send
a new message:
1. Touch the “Phone” soft-key,
2. Touch the “messaging” soft-key then “New Message,”
3. Touch one of the 18 preset messages and the person
you wish to send the message to,
4. If multiple numbers are available for the contact select
which number you would like to have the message sent,
5. Press “Send” or “Cancel.”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
Send Messages Using Voice Commands:
1. Press the
button,
After the system confirms that you want to send your
message to John Smith, your message will be sent.
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Send message to John Smith mobile,”
3. After the system prompts you for what message you
want to send, say the message you wish to send or say
“List.” There are 18 preset messages.
While the list of defined messages are being read, you can
button and
interrupt the system by pressing the
saying the message you want to send.
3
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
List of Preset Messages:
10. I will be <number> minutes late.
1. Yes.
11. See you in <number> minutes.
2. No.
12. Stuck in traffic.
3. Okay.
13. Start without me.
4. I can’t talk right now.
14. Where are you?
5. Call me.
15. Are you there yet?
6. I’ll call you later.
16. I need directions.
7. I’m on my way.
17. I’m lost.
8. Thanks.
18. See you later.
9. I’ll be late.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
Bluetooth® Communication Link
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect® Phone. When this happens, the connection
can generally be reestablished by switching the mobile
phone OFF/ON. Your mobile phone is recommended to
remain in Bluetooth® ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.
3
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Tree
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
6. Send dial tones for automated systems is available
while a call is active. This is an example that uses a
You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your
Phonebook Record named “Voicemail Password.”
mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send a
message to John Smith” and the system will ask you 7. Storing Dial tones in contact names is possible but only
the first number encountered in a contact name will be
which phone number you want to send a message to for
sent. For example if there is a number stored in the
John Smith.
Home and Work numbers for the contact “Voicemail
You can replace “Mobile” with “Home,” “Work” or
password” only the Home number will be sent.
“Other.”
8. If your phone does not support phonebook download or
You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing
call log download over Bluetooth® then these commands
Calls” or “Missed Calls.”
will return a response that the contact does not exist in
the phonebook.
You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone
9. Emergency and Towing assistance are contacts that have
number supported by your Mobile phone.
been pre-loaded in the phonebook. Commands such as
These commands can be used during a phone call after
“Call Emergency” and “Call Towing Assistance” will call
pushing the Uconnect® Voice Command button on
the corresponding number stored with those contacts.
the steering wheel. Please note the call will be muted
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
while the VR session is active.
face and underlined in the gray shaded boxes.
NOTE:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
NOTE:
5. You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone
number supported by your Mobile phone.
1. You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your
mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send 6. You can replace “4” with any message number shown
a message to John Smith” and the system will ask you
on the screen.
which phone number you want to send a message to
7. If your phone does not support phonebook download
for John Smith.
or call log download over Bluetooth® then these
2. You can replace “Mobile” with “Home,” “Work” or
commands will return a response that the contact does
“Other.”
not exist in the phonebook.
3. You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing
Calls” or “Missed Calls.”
4. Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect®
system is equipped with this feature and the mobile
phone supports messaging over Bluetooth®.
3
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold VOICE COMMAND
face and underlined in the gray shaded boxes.
Uconnect® 8.4/8.4 Nav
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
The Uconnect® Voice Command system allows
you to control your AM, FM radio, satellite
radio, disc player, SD Card, USB/iPod and
SiriusXM Travel Link.
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Command
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
system as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of
the Voice Command system to recognize user voice
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking
• This device must accept any interference received, or a raised voice level.
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
3
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your attention should be focused on safely operating the
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
If no command is spoken the system will say one of two
responses:
• I didn’t understand
• I didn’t get that, etc.
If a command is not spoken a second time, the system
will respond with an error and give some direction as
what can be said based on the context you are in. After
When you press the Uconnect® Voice Command three consecutive failures of a spoken command the VR
button, you will hear a beep. The beep is your signal session will end.
to give a command.
button
Pressing the Uconnect® Voice Command
while the system is speaking is known as “barging in.”
The system will be interrupted, and after the beep, you
can say a command. This will become helpful once you
start to learn the options.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel” or At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
“Help.”
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
These commands are universal and can be used from any To hear available commands, press the Uconnect® Voice
button and say “Help.” You will hear
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon Command
available commands for the screen displayed.
the active application.
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at Natural Speech
a normal speaking volume.
Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in
The system will best recognize your speech if the win- phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out
dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah”
set to low.
and “eh.” The system handles fill-in words such as “I
would like to.”
3
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase
or sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly
Smith.” For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence, the system identifies the topic or context and
provides the associated follow-up prompt such as “Who
do you want to call?” in the case where a phone call was
requested but the specific name was not recognized.
Uconnect® Voice Commands
The Uconnect® Voice Command system understands
two types of commands. Universal commands are available at all times. Local commands are available if the
supported radio mode is active.
Start a dialogue by pressing the Uconnect® Voice Combutton.
mand
The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the system
requires more information from the user it will ask a Changing The Volume
question to which the user can respond without pressing 1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button.
the Uconnect® Voice Command
button.
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command system is speaking. Please note the volume
setting for Voice Command is different than the audio
system.
Starting Voice Recognition (VR) Session in
Radio/Player Modes
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
NOTE: The commands can be said on any screen when a
call is not active after pushing the Uconnect® Voice
button.
Command
Source
To switch to the audio source, say “Change source to
Disc” for example. This command can be given in any
mode or screen:
• “Track” (#) (to change the track)
3
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Tree
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
NOTE:
1. You can replace “950 AM” with any other AM or FM
frequency, such as “98.7 FM.”
2. You can replace “80’s on 8” with any other satellite
station name received by the radio.
3. You can replace “8” with any other satellite channel
number received by the radio.
4. You can replace “rock” with any of the satellite music
types.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and shaded grey.
3
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
NOTE:
1. You can replace the album, artist, song, genre, playlist,
podcast and audio book names with any corresponding names on the current device that is playing.
2. You can replace “8” with any track on the CD that is
currently playing. Command is only available when
CD is playing.
3. Playlist, Podcast and audio book commands are only
available when the iPod® is connected and playing.
4. VR commands, Albums, Artists, and Genre names are
based on the music metadata contained on the
loaded/connected device.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and shaded grey.
3
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
NOTE:
1. You can replace “NFL” with any league shown on the
sports league screen. For example you can say “Show
MLB headlines” or “Show PGA headlines.”
2. You can replace “Headlines” with any menu items
shown on a league screen. For example you can say
“Show NFL Schedule and results” or “Show NCAA
Basketball AP top 25” or “Show Major League Baseball
Teams.”
3. You can also say “Show Current Weather” or “Show
extended weather” or “Show five day forecast” or
“Show ski info” to get other forecasts.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and shaded grey.
3
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
NOTE:
1. Only available with Navigation equipped vehicles.
2. You can replace “Player” with “Radio,” “Navigation,”
“Phone,” “Climate,” “More” or “Settings.”
3. Navigation commands only work if equipped with
Navigation.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and shaded grey.
3
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
NOTE:
SEATS
1. You can also say “Find City,” “Find Favorite,” “Find Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
Play by Category,” “Find Play by Name,” “Find Re- vehicle.
cently Found,” “Where to?” or “Go Home.”
2. You can say “Find Nearest” then “Restaurant,” “Fuel,”
“Transit,” “Lodging,” “Shopping,” “Bank,” “Entertainment,” “Recreation,” “Attractions,” “Community,” “Auto
Services,” “Hospitals,” “Parking,” “Airport,” “Police Stations,” “Fire Stations,” or “Auto Dealers.”
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and shaded grey.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
3
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The power seat switch is on the outboard side of the seat The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
near the floor. Use this switch to move the seat up, down, Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
forward, rearward or to tilt the seat.
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
Power Seat Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
WARNING! (Continued)
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
or rear of the seat switch; the front or rear of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury
or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement is
stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.
(Continued)
3
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
The Power Lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of
the driver’s seat. Push the switch forward to increase the
lumbar support. Push the switch rearward to decrease the
lumbar support. Pushing upward or downward on the
switch will raise or lower the position of the support.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front driver and passenger seats
may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions
and seatbacks. The heated seats are operated using the
Uconnect® System.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
(Continued)
Power Lumbar Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
Touch the “Driver” or “Pass” seat soft-key (located on the Uconnect® display) once to select
HI-level heating. Touch the soft-key a second
time to select LO-level heating. Touch the softkey a third time to shut the heating elements OFF.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the
For Vehicles Equipped With Uconnect® 4.3:
system will automatically switch to LO-level after apTouch the CLIMATE hard-key (located on the left side of
proximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that
the Uconnect® display) to enter the climate control
time, the display will change from HI to LO, indicating
screen.
the change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
3
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Press the “Driver” or “Passenger” seat soft-key
once to select HI-level heating. Press the soft-key
a second time to select LO-level heating. Press
Press the “Controls” soft-key located on the Uconnect®
the soft-key a third time to shut the heating
display.
elements OFF.
For Vehicles Equipped With Uconnect® 8.4 and
8.4 Nav:
Controls Soft-Key
Heated Seats Soft-Keys
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
driver’s heated seat can be programmed to come on
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System
— If Equipped” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
3
Manual Front Seat Adjustments
For models equipped with manual seats, the driver and
passenger seats can be adjusted forward or rearward by
using a bar located by the front of the seat cushion, near
the floor.
Manual Seat Adjustment
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located and
move the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once
the desired position has been reached. Then, using body
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Recliner Adjustment
The recline lever is located on the outboard side of the
seat. To recline the seat, lean forward slightly, lift the
lever, lean back to the desired position and release the
lever. To return the seatback to its normal upright position, lean forward and lift the lever. Release the lever
once the seatback is in the upright position.
Seatback Release
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
Driver’s Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped
The seat height control lever is located on the outboard
side of the seat. Raise the lever to raise the seat. Lower the
lever to lower the seat. The total seat travel is approximately 2.15 in (55 mm).
Seat Height Adjustment Lever
3
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fold-Flat Front Passenger Seat — If Equipped
Pull upward on the recline lever to fold or unfold the
This feature allows for extended cargo space. When the seat seat.
is folded flat, it is an extension of the load floor surface
WARNING!
(allowing long cargo to fit from the rear hatch up to the
instrument panel). The fold-flat seatback also has a hardback
surface that you can use as a work surface when the seat is Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
folded flat and the vehicle is not in motion.
cause you to lose control. Adjust any seat only while
the vehicle is parked.
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
Fold-Flat Seat
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
Active Head Restraints (AHR) — Front Seats
Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment can not be
readily identified by any markings, only through visual
inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be
split in two halves, with the front half being soft foam
and trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Safety” for further information.
3
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
For comfort, the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
forward and backward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the
head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your head.
Push Button
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
NOTE:
• The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.
• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Supplemental
Active Head Restraints (AHR)/Resetting Active Head
Restraints (AHR)” in “Safety” for further information.
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
3
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the operation
of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a collision
and could result in serious injury or death.
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are
struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured,
as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to follow this
warning could cause personal injury if the Active
Head Restraint is deployed.
Head Restraints — Second Row Seats
The rear seats are equipped with adjustable head restraints. To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the
adjustment button, located on the base of the head
restraint, and push downward on the head restraint.
Adjustment Button
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
NOTE:
Third Row Passenger Seats — Seven Passenger
Models
• The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If any of the These head restraints are non-adjustable and nonhead restraints require removal, see your authorized removable. However, you can fold them forward when
they are not in use by passengers. Refer to “50/50 Split
dealer.
Third-Row Passenger Seats With Fold-Flat Feature —
• For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether, refer to Seven Passenger Models” for further information.
“Occupant Restraints” in “Safety”.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the head restraints removed or
improperly adjusted could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision. The head restraints
should be checked prior to operating the vehicle and
never adjusted while the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING!
Do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row seat
without having the head restraint unfolded and
locked in place. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury to the passenger in the event
of a collision.
3
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
60/40 Split Second-Row Passenger Seats
To provide additional storage area, each second-row
passenger seat can be folded flat. This allows for extended cargo space and still maintains some seating room
if needed.
NOTE: Prior to folding the second-row passenger seat,
make sure the front seatback is not in a reclined position.
This will allow the second-row seat to fold easily.
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• On seven passenger models, do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row seat with the second row
seatback(s) folded flat. In a collision, the passenger
could slide underneath the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
3. Lift the control lever with the other hand, allow the
seatback to move forward slightly, and then release the
1. Locate the control lever on the lower outboard side of
lever.
the seat.
To Fold The Seat
WARNING!
To prevent personal injury or damage to objects,
keep your head, arms, and objects out of the folding
path of the seatback.
4. Gently guide the seatback into the folded position.
Seatback Release
2. Place one hand on the seatback and apply a gentle
pressure.
3
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Unfold The Seat
Raise the seatback and lock it in place.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is locked securely into
position. Otherwise, the seat will not provide the
proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
Forward And Rearward Adjustment
The control lever is on the outboard side of the seat. Lift
the lever to move the seat forward or rearward. Release
the lever once the seat is in the desired position. Then,
using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the
seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
Manual Seat Adjustment
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.
3
Recliner Adjustment
The recline lever is on the outboard side of the seat. To
recline the seatback, lean back, lift the lever, position the
seatback as desired, and then release the lever. To return
the seatback to its normal upright position, lean back, lift
the lever, lean forward, and then release the lever once
the seatback is in the upright position.
Recline Lever
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
Seatback/Armrest — Second Row Passenger Seat
Seatback/Armrest
Raise the seatback/armrest and lock it in place when not
The latch release-loop is located at the top of the in use, or when additional seating area is required.
seatback/armrest. Pull the release-loop forward to release the latch and then downward to lower the
seatback/armrest.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
WARNING!
Keep the latch clean and free of objects and be
certain that the seatback/armrest is locked securely
into position. Otherwise, the seat will not provide the
proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
Move the control lever on the upper outboard side of the
seatback forward. Then, in one fluid motion, the seat
cushion flips upward and the seat moves forward on its
tracks.
3
Stadium Tip ’n Slide™ (Easy Entry/Exit Seat) —
Seven Passenger Models
This feature allows passengers to easily enter or exit the
third-row passenger seats from either side of the vehicle.
To Move The Second-Row Passenger Seat Forward
NOTE: Raise the seatback/armrest before moving the
seat to allow for full seat travel.
Tip ’n Slide™ Control Lever
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle with the seat in this position, as it is only intended for entering and exiting
the third row seats. Failure to follow this warning
may result in personal injury.
To Unfold And Move The Second-Row Passenger Seat
Rearward
Tip ’n Slide™ Seat
Move the seatback rearward until it locks in place and
then continue sliding the seat rearward on its tracks until
it locks in place.
NOTE: A hand-grip is molded into the front of each Push the seat cushion downward to lock it in place.
quarter trim panel near the door opening to assist entry Adjust the seat track position as desired. Using body
and exit from the third-row passenger seats.
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback and seat are locked
securely into position. Otherwise, the seat will not
provide the proper stability for child seats and/or
passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause
serious injury.
To Fold The Seatback
Pull the latch release-loop located at the top of the
seatback upward, push the seatback forward slightly, and
release the release-loop. Then, continue to push the
seatback forward. The head restraints will fold automatically as the seatback moves forward.
50/50 Split Third-Row Passenger Seats With
Fold-Flat Feature — Seven Passenger Models
To provide additional storage area, each third-row passenger seatback can be folded flat. This allows for extended cargo space and still maintains some rear seating
room if needed.
NOTE: Prior to folding the third-row passenger seatback, make sure the second-row passenger seatback is
not in a reclined position. This will allow the seatback to
fold easily.
Seatback Release
3
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The seatback can also be locked in the reclined position.
Grasp the assist strap loop on the seatback and pull it To do so, pull the latch release-loop located at the top of
toward you to raise the seatback. Continue to raise the the seatback upward, allow the seatback to recline, and
release the release-loop.
seatback until it locks in place. Raise the head restraint to
lock it in place.
To Unfold The Seatback
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is locked securely into
position. Otherwise, the seat will not provide the
proper stability for passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
• Do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row seat
without having the head restraint unfolded and
locked in place. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury to the passenger in the
event of a collision.
(Continued)
Assist Strap
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row seat
with the second row seatback(s) folded flat. In a
collision, the passenger could slide underneath the
seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured.
3
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
of the instrument panel.
Hood Release
2. Outside of the vehicle, locate the safety latch lever
near the center of the grille between the grille and
hood opening. Push the safety latch lever to the right
and then raise the hood.
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Underhood Safety Latch
3. Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open
position. Place the upper end of the prop rod in the
hole on the underside of the hood.
Hood Prop Rod
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage:
• Before closing hood, make sure the hood prop rod
is fully seated into its storage retaining clips.
• Do not slam the hood to close it. Use a firm
downward push at the center front edge of the
hood to ensure that both latches engage. Never
drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed,
with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of
the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights,
instrument panel light dimming, interior lights and fog
lights.
3
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the
AUTO position. When the system is on, the headlight
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the
ignition into the OFF position. To turn the automatic
system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
position.
Headlight Switch
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking lights and instrument panel light operation.
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
headlight, parking light and instrument panel light operation.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights will come on in the automatic mode.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
To activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition switch
while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the
headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
when the headlight switch is turned off.
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature.
turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
If you turn the headlights, parking lights or ignition
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be switch ON again, the system will cancel the delay.
turned on or off using the Uconnect® System, refer to If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru- turn off in the normal manner.
ment Panel” for further information.
NOTE: The Headlight Time Delay is programmable usHeadlight Time Delay
ing the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® Settings
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination — Customer Programmable Features” in “Understandfor up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
unlit area.
Headlights On With Wipers (Available with
Automatic Headlights Only)
3
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The Daytime Running Lights will turn ON the first time The front fog light switch is built into the headlight
the vehicle is shifted out of PARK, and remain ON unless switch.
the parking brake is applied. Upon returning to the
PARK position, the DRLs will turn OFF. DRLs will turn
OFF when the ignition is switched OFF.
NOTE: The daytime running lights can be turned on and
off using the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect®
Settings — Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the driver
when the driver’s door is opened.
Fog Light Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and press the
headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights, either
press the headlight switch a second time or turn off the
headlight switch.
3
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate when the low beam
headlights or parking lights are on. However, selecting
the high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Multifunction Lever
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn Turn Signals
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
steering column.
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
High/Low Beam Switch
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the EVIC lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
(if equipped) and a continuous chime will sound if the will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is
vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either released.
turn signal on.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
Interior Lights
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to
the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights
were switched on manually or are on because a door is
open. This includes the glove box light, but not the trunk
light. To restore interior light operation, either turn the
ignition to the ON/RUN position or cycle the light
switch.
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is
located on the left side of the instrument panel. Rotating
the dimmer control upward with the parking lights or
headlights on will increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights, door map pockets and cupholders (if
equipped).
3
Dimmer Controls
Dome Light Position
Rotate the left dimmer control completely upward to the
second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior
lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this
position.
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom off The windshield wiper/washer control lever is located on
position. The interior lights will remain off when the the left side of the steering column.
doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to
the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays
such as the odometer, EVIC (if equipped), and radio
when the position lights or headlights are on.
Map/Reading Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the
overhead console. Refer to “Overhead Console” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch,
located at the end of the lever. For information on using
the rear window wiper/washer, refer to “Rear Window
Features” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
3
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper system when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause
between cycles, desirable. Rotate the end of the windshield wiper/washer control lever to one of the first five
detents to select the desired delay interval.
Front Wiper Control
There are five delay settings, which allow you to regulate
the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every two
seconds to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
between cycles at vehicle speeds below 10 mph
(16 km/h). At speeds greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), the
delay varies from a minimum of one cycle every second
to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between
cycles.
NOTE: The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed.
If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h),
delay times will be doubled.
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever upward, to the first detent past
the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation.
Front Wiper Control
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent
NOTE: The wipers will automatically return to the
past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper opera“park” position if you turn OFF the ignition switch while
tion.
they are operating. The wipers will resume operation
when you turn the ignition switch back to the ON
position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
CAUTION!
• Turn the windshield wipers OFF when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
is left in any position other than OFF.
• In cold weather, always turn OFF the wiper switch
and allow the wipers to return to the park position
before turning OFF the engine. If the wiper switch
is left ON and the wipers freeze to the windshield,
damage to the wiper motor may occur when the
vehicle is restarted.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the
windshield wiper blades from returning to the “park”
position. If the windshield wiper control is turned
OFF, and the blades cannot return to the “park”
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Windshield Washers
To use the windshield washer, push the washer knob,
located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to
the second detent.
If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in
the delay range, the wipers will operate in low-speed for
two or three wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then
resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in
the OFF position, the wipers will operate for two or three
wipe cycles and then turn OFF.
3
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Headlights On With Wipers (Available with
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect® System, refer to
Push the washer knob, located on the end of the multi- “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrufunction lever, inward to the first detent to activate a ment Panel” for further information.
single wipe cycle to clear the windshield of road mist or TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
spray from a passing vehicle. The wipers will continue to
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
operate until you release the lever.
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to the steering column.
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Mist Feature
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering
column in position, pull the control handle upward until
fully engaged.
WARNING!
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Control Handle
To unlock the steering column, push the control handle
downward. To tilt the steering column, move the steering
wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the
steering column is locked before driving your vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
3
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for up
to 80 minutes before automatically shutting off. The
heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn
on when the steering wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel can be turned on and off using
the Uconnect® System.
Touch the “Controls” soft-key then touch the “Heated
Wheel” soft-key to turn on the heated steering wheel.
Press the “Heated Wheel” soft-key a second time to turn
the heated steering wheel off.
Controls Soft-Key
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System
— If Equipped” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
Heated Steering Wheel Soft-Key
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.
(Continued)
3
240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF
4 — CANCEL
2 — RES +
3 — SET -
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Activate
To Set A Desired Speed
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pressing the SET (-) button.
3
242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
(1.0 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1.0 km/h).
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control with- To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is
set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually
out erasing the set speed memory.
held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to
Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition
decrease until the button is released. Release the button
switch OFF erases the set speed memory.
when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed
To Resume Speed
will be established.
To Deactivate
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed (1.0 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1.0 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
NOTE: Tap results of 1 mph or 1 km/h depends on
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in- selection of US or METRIC units in the EVIC display
crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the button settings menu, or the RADIO settings menu (dependent
is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to on vehicle configuration).
increase until the button is released, then the new set
speed will be established.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
moderate hills is normal.
EQUIPPED
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist system provides visual
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed and audible indications of the distance between the rear
Control.
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
during a parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense® System Usage Precautions” for limitations of this system and
recommendations.
3
244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or ParkSense® Warning Display
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if
changed to the ON/RUN position.
Sound and Display is selected from the Uconnect®
ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever is in System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “UnderstandREVERSE. If ParkSense® is enabled at this shift lever ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle The ParkSense® Warning screen is located within the
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). It provides
above. The system will become active again if the vehicle visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Elec6 mph (9 km/h).
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Settings” in
ParkSense® Sensors
The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245
ParkSense® Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display
will turn ON indicating the system status.
3
Park Assist System Off
Park Assist Ready
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
three solid arcs and will produce a one-half second tone.
As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the EVIC
display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will
change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Slow Tone
Fast Tone
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
3
Continuous Tone
248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
Arcs
Greater than
79 in (200 cm)
None
None
WARNING ALERTS
79-39 in
39-25 in
(200-100 cm)
(100-65 cm)
Single 1/2Slow
Second Tone
3 Solid
3 Slow
(Continuous)
Flashing
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®
ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled using the
Uconnect® System. The available choices are: Off, Sound
Only, or Sound and Display. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Fast
Less than
12 in (30 cm)
Continuous
2 Slow
Flashing
1 Slow
Flashing
When the ParkSense® soft-key is pressed to disable the
system, the EVIC will display the “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for approximately five seconds.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE
and the system is disabled, the EVIC will display the
“PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249
If “CLEAN PARK ASSIST” appears in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) make sure the outer
surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper is
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense® Rear Park
clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstrucAssist system has detected a fault condition, the Election and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will actuate a
to appear see an authorized dealer.
single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display
the “CLEAN PARK ASSIST”, “SERVICE PARK ASSIST”, If “SERVICE PARK ASSIST” or “SERVICE PARK ASSIST
or “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message. Refer to SYSTEM” appears in the EVIC, see an authorized dealer.
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “UnCleaning The ParkSense® System
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap
system has detected a fault condition, the EVIC will and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
display the ⬙CLEAN PARK ASSIST⬙, ⬙SERVICE PARK scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damASSIST⬙, OR ⬙SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM⬙ mes- age the sensors.
sages for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this
condition, ParkSense® will not operate.
Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
System
3
250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
NOTE:
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense® system operobstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
ating properly.
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
bumper.
affect the performance of ParkSense®.
• Ensure the ParkSense® system is OFF if objects such as
• When you turn ParkSense® off, the EVIC will display
bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc., are placed within
“PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF.” Furthermore, once you
12 in (30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to
turn ParkSense® off, it remains off until you turn it on
do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close
again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
object as a sensor problem, causing the “SERVICE
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message to be displayed in
• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
the EVIC.
position and ParkSense® is turned off, the EVIC will
display the “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for
as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
ParkSense® System Usage Precautions
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense®.
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense®. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
(Continued)
3
252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of
the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.
The ParkView® camera is located on the rear of the
vehicle above the rear License plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen
appears again.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253
When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the width The following table shows the approximate distances for
of the vehicle and will show separate zones that will each zone:
help indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle.
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green
Distance to the rear of the vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
3
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to
do so can result in serious injury or death.
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView® should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView® camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive
path.
(Continued)
254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView® to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView®.
Turning ParkView® On Or Off — With
Touchscreen Radio
1. Turn the Radio on.
2. Press the “More” soft-key.
3. Press the “Settings” soft-key.
4. Press the “Safety & Driving Assistance” soft-key.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with 5. Press the check box soft key next to “Parkview®
Backup Camera” to enable/disable.
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights,
storage for sunglasses, an interior observation mirror and
an optional power sunroof switch.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255
courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Press in on
each lens to turn these lights on while inside the vehicle.
Press the lens a second time to turn each light off. You
may adjust the direction of these lights by pressing the
outside ring, which is identified with four directional
arrows.
Overhead Console
Courtesy/Reading Lights
The overhead console has two courtesy lights. The lights
turn on when a front door, a sliding door or the liftgate is
opened. If your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) the lights will also turn on when the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter is pressed. The
Courtesy/Reading Light
3
256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Sunglasses Storage
Interior Observation Mirror
To access the storage compartment, press on the raised The convex interior observation mirror provides the
bars on the compartment door in the center of the console driver and front seat passenger a wide field of view to
and release and the door will swing downward.
conveniently view passengers sitting in the rear passenger seats. To use the interior observation mirror, press on
the raised bars on the compartment door and release (the
door will swing downward), then raise the door until it is
almost closed and release. The door will latch in position
to use the interior observation mirror.
NOTE: From the “observation mirror” position, the door
can only be closed.
To return to the full open position, the door must first be
closed and then opened by pressing the latch again to
release.
Sunglasses Storage Compartment
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt
battery.
The HomeLink® buttons, located on either the overhead
console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three different HomeLink® channels. The HomeLink® indicator is
located above the center button.
Observation Mirror
Power Sunroof Switch — If Equipped
Refer to “Power Sunroof” in “Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle” for further information.
3
258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
HomeLink® Buttons/Overhead Consoles
HomeLink® Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner
NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®
NOTE:
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage • Erasing all channels should only be performed when
before you begin programming.
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that • If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink®
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
system.
Programming A Rolling Code
Erase all channels before you begin programming. To
erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN For programming garage door openers that were manuposition and press and hold the two outside HomeLink® factured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
indicator flashes.
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
3
260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in
view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink®
button you want to program and the hand-held transmitter button.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
Firmly press and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds.
Do not release the button.
6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for two 3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programseconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
ming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining
activates, programming is complete.
steps.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not activate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to
complete the training.
3
262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
• To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in
view.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink® To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
button you want to program and the hand-held trans- follow these steps:
mitter button.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds.
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
Do not release the button.
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
remaining steps.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program
several seconds of transmission.
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig- 3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button,
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transwhile you press and release (“cycle”), your hand-held
mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink®
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indiCanadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
time-out in the same manner.
fully trained.
3
264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage follow these steps:
door may open and close while you are programming.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
and observe the indicator light.
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programDo not release the button.
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Canadian/
• To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons,
Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and follow all
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
remaining steps.
erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265
Using HomeLink®
Troubleshooting Tips
To operate, press and release the programmed HomeLink®
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed
device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.,). The
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any
time.
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
here are some of the most common solutions:
Security
• Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitter.
• Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
in your vehicle.
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
3
266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause
serious injury or death.
use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet
at www.HomeLink.com for safety information or
assistance.
General Information
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets
or other objects are in the path of the door or gate.
Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by
Federal safety standards. This includes most garage
door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
(Continued)
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
3
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switch
268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and
do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children. Do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go™ in the ACC or ON/Run mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the
power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result
in serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
(Continued)
Opening Sunroof — Express
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automatically from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will
open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express
Open.” During Express Open operation, any movement
of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
Sunroof Fully Closed
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward to
full open. Any release of the switch will stop the movement.
The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a partially opened
condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward
again.
Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the
sunroof is fully closed.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obClosing Sunroof — Express
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstrucsecond and the sunroof will close automatically from any tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. release to Express Close.
This is called “Express Close”. During Express Close operaVenting Sunroof — Express
tion, any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Press and release the Vent button within one half second
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
forward again.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
3
270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Sunshade Operation
Sunroof Maintenance
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens. the glass panel.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is Ignition Off Operation
open.
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
The power sunroof switch will remain active for 45
seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to 10
minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271
NOTE: The delay time if programmable using the
Uconnect® system. Refer to “Uconnect® System” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
3
A 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet located in the center
console below the radio. The power outlet has power
available when the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or
ACC position.
Front 12 Volt Power Outlet
This power outlet will also operate a conventional cigar
lighter unit. To preserve the heating element, do not
hold the lighter in the heating position.
272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
A second 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet is located inside
the center console storage area. Power is available with
the ignition switch in the ON/RUN, ACC or LOCK
position.
A third fused 12 Volt power outlet is located on the back
of the center console. This power outlet has power
available when the ignition switch is in the LOCK, ON or
ACC position.
Center Console 12 Volt Power Outlet
Rear Seat 12 Volt Power Outlet
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273
A fourth fused 12 Volt power outlet is located on the left NOTE: To ensure proper operation a MOPAR® knob
quarter trim panel in the cargo area. This power outlet and element must be used.
has power available when the ignition switch is in the
ON or ACC position.
CAUTION!
Rear Cargo Area Power Outlet
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp)
power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the
system will need to be replaced.
• The power outlet on the bottom of the center
console shares the fuse with the power outlet on
the back of the console. The combined usage must
not exceed 160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
3
274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Power Outlet Fuses
1 — F103 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin & Power Outlet
Console Rear
2 — F102 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel & Power
Outlet Left Rear Cargo Area
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug.
(Continued)
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a 115 Volt AC
(150 Watt maximum) power outlet located on the back of
the center console. This outlet can power mobile phones,
electronics and other low power devices requiring power
up to 150 Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as
Playstation3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as
will most power tools.
3
276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
may have to be reset manually. To reset the inverter
manually press the power inverter button OFF and ON.
To avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratings
on electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
NOTE: Due to built-in overload protection, the power
outlet will shut down if the 115 Volt AC (150 Watt
maximum) power rating is exceeded.
WARNING!
Power Inverter
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating
exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not use a three-prong adaptor.
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277
Power Inverter Operation
CUPHOLDERS
The power inverter is turned on and off using the There are two cupholders, located in the center floor
Uconnect® System.
console, for the front passengers.
Vehicles Equipped With Uconnect® 4.3
3
To turn the power inverter on or off perform the following:
1. Press the “More” hard-key (located next to the
Uconnect® display).
2. Press the “Outlet” soft-key (located on the Uconnect®
display) to turn the power inverter On or Off.
Vehicles Equipped With Uconnect® 8.4 and 8.4 Nav
To enable or disable the power inverter perform the
following:
1. Press the “Controls” soft-key.
Floor Console Cupholders
For passengers in the second row there are two cuphold2. Press the “Outlet” soft-key to turn the power inverter ers, located in the center armrest between the two seats.
On or Off.
278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the armrest is folded flat the cupholders are in the In addition to cupholders, vehicles may also be equipped
back of the Head Restraint. The Head Restraint can be with bottle holders. The bottle holders are located on the
door trim panels.
adjusted to better position the cupholders.
Armrest Cupholders
For vehicles equipped with third row seating, there are
additional cupholders located in the trim panels.
Door Bottle Holder
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle
holder, they can spill when the door is closed, burning the occupants. Be careful when closing the doors
to avoid injury.
3
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side
of the instrument panel. Pull on the release handle to
open the glove compartment.
Glove Compartment
280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Floor Console Storage
Center Console Storage
An open storage area, or cubby bin, is located in the floor There is a storage compartment located under the center
console.
console armrest.
Floor Console Cubby Bin
Center Console
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281
Pull upward on the release handle, located on the front of Sliding Armrest
the lid, to open the storage compartment.
The center console armrest can also be slid rearward for
easy access to the storage area.
3
Opened Storage Compartment
Sliding Armrest
282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Cellular phones, music
players, and other handheld electronic devices
should be stowed while driving. Use of these devices
while driving can cause an accident due to distraction, resulting in death or injury.
Flip ’n Stow™ Front Passenger Seat Storage — If
Equipped
The seat latch release-loop is located in the center of the
Front Passenger Seat Storage Compartment
seat cushion between the seat cushion and the seatback.
NOTE:
Make sure that objects inside the bin do not
Pull the loop upward to release the latch and then
interfere
with the latch before closing the seat. Push the
forward to open the seat to the detent position.
seat cushion downward after closing it to make sure it
latches to the base.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 283
WARNING!
Be certain that the seat cushion is locked securely
into position before using the seat. Otherwise, the
seat will not provide the proper stability for passengers. An improperly latched seat cushion could cause
serious injury.
3
Second-Row Passenger Seat Temporary
Storage Bin
This is a temporary storage bin designed for use when
the seatback/armrest is down. Be sure to remove all
items from this bin before raising the seatback/armrest.
Second-Row Map Pocket And Grocery
Retainers — If Equipped
A map storage pocket and grocery retainers are located
on the back of the drivers seatback.
Seat Storage And Grocery Retainers
In-Floor Storage Bin With Removable Liner
NOTE: Position the front seat to at least a mid-track
position to provide easier access to the storage bin.
284 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
An in-floor storage bin is located behind each front seat. The liner can be removed for easy cleaning by lifting on
Each 1.6 gal (5.9L) bin can hold up to 12, 12 oz (0.35L) the notches as shown.
cans, plus ice, or other items. The removable bin liner
allows for easy filling, emptying, and cleaning.
To access the bin, position the floor mat aside (if equipped).
Pull the door latch release-loop upward to release the latch
and then forward to open the bin door.
Removable Liner
In-Floor Storage
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 285
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Rechargeable Flashlight — If Equipped
To operate the flashlight, press the switch once for high,
twice for low, and a third time to return to off.
The rechargeable LED flashlight stores in its charging station
in the left rear quarter trim panel. To remove it, press on the
indent on the side of the flashlight and release.
3
Three-Press Switch
Rechargeable Flashlight
NOTE: Be sure to return the flashlight to its charging
station when not in use to ensure it is ready for operation
the next time you need it.
286 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Cargo Management System
Seven Passenger System Features
• A large built-in storage bin with a hinged hardcover
located in the floor behind the third-row passenger
A raised load floor that sits on top of a large built-in
seats.
storage bin.
• 60/40 split second-row passenger seats with fold flat
A tri-fold door built into the load floor that allows easy
feature, which allows for extended cargo space. Refer
access to items in the built-in storage bin.
to “Seats” in “Understanding The Features of Your
60/40 split second-row passenger seats with fold flat
Vehicle” for further information.
feature, which allows for extended cargo space. Refer
• 50/50 split third-row passenger seats with fold flat
to “Seats” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
feature, which allows for extended cargo space. Refer
Vehicle” for further information.
to “Seats” in “Understanding The Features of Your
An optional front passenger seat with fold flat feature,
Vehicle” for further information.
which extends cargo space even further. Refer to
• An optional front passenger seat with fold flat feature,
“Seats” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vewhich extends cargo space even further. Refer to
hicle” for further information.
“Seats” in “Understanding The Features of Your VeCargo tie-downs.
hicle” for further information.
Five Passenger System Features
•
•
•
•
•
• A retractable cargo area cover (if equipped).
• Cargo tie-downs.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 287
Cargo Tie-Downs
WARNING!
Cargo tie-downs are not safe anchors for a child seat
tether strap. In a sudden stop or collision, a tie-down
could pull loose and allow the child seat to come
loose. A child could be badly injured. Use only the
anchors provided for child seat tethers.
Cargo tie-downs are located on both rear trim panels.
These tie-downs should be used to secure loads safely
when the vehicle is moving.
3
Cargo Tie-Downs
288 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your
vehicle:
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the
seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and
use seat belts.
• Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits described on the label attached to the left door or left Retractable Cargo Area Cover (If Equipped) — Five
door center pillar.
Passenger Models
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put NOTE: The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible. secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle. protect passengers from loose cargo.
Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or The removable retractable cargo area cover mounts in the
behind the rear axle can cause the vehicle to sway.
cargo area behind the top of the rear seats.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 289
The cover, when extended, covers the cargo area to keep
items out of sight. Notches in the trim panels near the
liftgate opening secure the extended cover in place.
The cover rolls away neatly inside its housing when not
in use. You can also remove the cover from the vehicle to
make more room in the cargo area.
3
To install the cover, position it in the vehicle so that the
flat side of the housing faces upward. Then, insert either
the left or the right spring-loaded post (located on the
ends of the cover housing) into the left attachment point
or the right attachment point (shown).
Installing Retractable Cargo Area Cover
Insert the spring-loaded post on the opposite end of the
cover housing into the attachment point on the opposite
side of the vehicle.
290 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Grab the cover handle and pull it toward you. As the
cover nears the liftgate opening, guide the rear attachment posts (on both ends of the cover) into the notches in
the trim panels. Lower the cover to position the posts into
the bottom of the notches and release the handle.
Positioning Retractable Cargo Area Cover
WARNING!
A cargo cover that is unsecured in the vehicle could
cause injury in a collision. It could become airborne
during a sudden stop and strike someone inside the
vehicle. Do not store the cargo cover on the cargo
floor or in the passenger compartment. Remove the
cover from the vehicle when taken from its mounting. Do not store it in the vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 291
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear window wiper/washer control is located on the
left side of the steering column.
Rear Wiper/Washer
Rotate the switch upward to the first detent
position for rear wiper operation.
Rotate the switch upward past the first detent position to activate the rear washer. The washer pump
will continue to operate as long as the switch is held. Upon
release, the wiper will cycle three times before returning to
the set position.
3
292 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
to the LOCK position, the wiper will automatically return
to the “Park” position. When the vehicle is restarted, the
wiper will resume function at whichever position the
switch is set at.
• Turn the rear wiper off when driving through an
automatic car wash. Damage to the rear wiper may
result if the rear wiper switch is left in the ON
position.
• In cold weather, always turn off the rear wiper
switch and allow the rear wiper to return to the
park position before turning off the engine. If the
rear wiper switch is left on and the rear wiper
freezes to the window, damage to the rear wiper
motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the rear wiper blade from returning to the park
position. If the rear wiper control is turned off and
the blade cannot return to the park position, damage to the rear wiper motor may occur.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 293
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on
the climate control panel. Press this button to turn
on the rear window defroster and the heated outside
mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will
illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
3
294 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
2. Relocate the cross rails, aligning the cross rail stanchions (end pieces) with one of the vertical marks on
the outboard surface of the side rail for proper positioning. There are four frontward marks for the front
cross rail and four rearward marks for the rear cross
rail. Make sure the cross rails remain equally spaced or
parallel at any position for proper function.
The roof rack cross rails and side rails are designed to
carry cargo weight. The load must not exceed 150 lbs
(68 kg), and it should be distributed uniformly over the
cross rails. In addition, the roof rack does not increase the
total load carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the
total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the roof
rack does not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity. 3. Tighten the knobs on each cross rail to lock it in
position. As you tighten the knob, make sure the
NOTE: Metal crossbars are offered by MOPAR® accesclamp tooth engages completely into the side rail slot.
sories. See your authorized dealer.
4. Attempt to move the cross rail to ensure that it is
To Move The Cross Rails
locked in position.
1. Loosen the knobs on top of each cross rail approximately six turns to disengage the clamp tooth from the
side rail.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 295
NOTE:
• To help control wind noise when installing the cross
rails, make sure the arrows marked on the underside
of the cross rails face the front of the vehicle.
• To help reduce the amount of wind noise when the
cross rails are not in use, fasten the front cross rail in
the fourth position from the front and the rear cross
rail in the eighth position. The tie down holes on the
cross rail ends should always be used to tie down the
load. Check the straps frequently to be sure that the
load remains securely attached.
CAUTION!
• Cross rails should remain equally spaced or parallel at any luggage rack position for proper function.
Noncompliance could result in damage to the roof
rack, cargo, and vehicle.
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do
not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of
150 lbs (68 kg). Always distribute loads as evenly as
possible and secure the load appropriately.
• Long loads, which extend over the windshield,
such as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with
large frontal area should be secured to both the
front and rear of the vehicle.
• Place a blanket or other protection between the
surface of the roof and the load.
(Continued)
3
296 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof
rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby
truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to loads.
This is especially true on large flat loads and may
result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .300
▫ Oil Change Due . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
▫ Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .302
▫ Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION
CENTER (EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
▫ Trip Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
▫ EVIC White Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
▫ EVIC Amber Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
▫ EVIC Red Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
▫ Tire PSI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
▫ Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features) . .323
▫ Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
▫ Turn Menu OFF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
䡵 Uconnect® SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
▫ Hard-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
4
298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Soft-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
▫ Play A DVD Using The Touchscreen Radio . . .355
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect® 4.3 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
▫ VES™ Remote Control — If Equipped . . . . . . .356
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect® System 8.4 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . .337
䡵 Uconnect® MULTIMEDIA — VIDEO
ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES™) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
▫ Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
▫ Single Video Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
▫ Play Video Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
▫ Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2
While A Video Is Playing On Channel 1. . . . . .353
▫ Remote Control Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
▫ Locking The Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
▫ Replacing The Remote Control Batteries. . . . . .360
▫ Headphones Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
▫ Replacing The Headphone Batteries. . . . . . . . .361
▫ Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
▫ Unwired® Stereo Headphone Lifetime
Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
▫ System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
䡵 iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
▫ Important Notes For Single Video Screen
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS . . . . . .374
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299
▫ Right-Hand Switch Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . .374 䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
▫ Left-Hand Switch Functions For Radio
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
▫ Manual Climate Controls With Touchscreen —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
▫ Left-Hand Switch Functions For Media (i.e., CD)
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
▫ Rear Manual Temperature Control (MTC) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . .375
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) With
Touchscreen — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .376
▫ Rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
4
300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1
2
3
4
5
— Side Window Demist Outlet
— Air Outlet
— Instrument Cluster
— Uconnect® System
— Glove Compartment
6 — Switch Bank
7 — Uconnect® Hard Controls
8 — SD Memory Card Slot
9 — Power Outlet
10 — CD/DVD Slot
11 — Engine Start/Stop Button
12 — Hood Release Lever
13 — Dimmer Controls
14 — Headlight Switch
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
4
302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
3. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic system, called OBD II, that
This gauge measures engine revolutions per minute
monitors engine and automatic transmission con(RPM x 1000). Before the pointer reaches the red area,
trol
systems.
The light will illuminate when the key is in
ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage.
the ON/RUN position, before engine start. If the bulb
2. Air Bag Warning Light
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after
during starting, stays on, or turns on while engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for not require towing.
further information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
4. Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
Activation/
If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in
the ESC system. If this light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible
to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the
ESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off
previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
4
304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn
signal when the turn signal lever is operated.
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on, a
continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the
signals off. If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check
for a defective outside light bulb.
6. High Beam Indicator
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction lever forward to switch the headlights to high beam, and pull
toward yourself (normal position) to return to low beam.
7. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front
fog lights are on.
8. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display
/ Odometer Display
Odometer Display The odometer display shows the total
distance the vehicle has been driven.
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
technician should leave the odometer reading the same
as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305
be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was 10. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If Equipped
before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/
should be checked monthly when cold and inservice, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or
flated to the inflation pressure recommended by
that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or
must be reset at zero.
tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea- or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
instrument cluster. For further information, refer to As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”.
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
9. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
This indicator will illuminate when the park
lights or headlights are turned on.
4
306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
11. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/
RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if
the driver or front passenger’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving,
if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound.
Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
12. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
4
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necesdetected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
sary.
inspected by an authorized dealer.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi- as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
tion.
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
14. Speedometer
13. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
Indicates vehicle speed.
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition 15. Fuel Door Reminder
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and
The arrow in this symbol is a reminder that the
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
Fuel Filler Door is located on the left side of the
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
vehicle.
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However, 16. Fuel Gauge
the conventional brake system will continue to operate The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
4
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
17. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
until the vehicle is disarmed.
18. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H” pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H” and
you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others
could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You
may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the hood
yourself, see “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. Follow the
warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful
information by pressing the switches mounted on the
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea- steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the following:
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the • Radio Info
instrument cluster.
• Fuel Economy
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)
• Vehicle Speed
• Trip Info
• Tire Pressure
• Vehicle Information
• Warning Message Displays
• Turn Menu OFF
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
4
312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The system allows the driver to select information by • UP Button
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
Press and release the UP button to scroll upwheel:
ward through the main menus (Fuel Economy,
Vehicle Info, Tire PSI, Cruise, Messages, Units)
and sub-menus.
• DOWN Button
Press and release the DOWN button to scroll
downward through the main menus and
sub-menus.
• SELECT Button
EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons
Press and release the SELECT button for access
to main menus or sub-menus. Press and hold
the SELECT button for two seconds to reset
features.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
• BACK Button
The main display area will normally display the main
menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main
Press the BACK button to scroll back to a
menu. The main display area also displays ⬙pop up⬙
previous menu.
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warning or information messages. These pop up messages fall
into several categories:
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays
• Five Second Stored Messages
The EVIC display consists of three sections:
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
1. The top line where compass direction, odometer line message takes control of the main display area for five
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of
and outside temperature are displayed.
the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the
2. The main display area where the menus and pop up condition that activated it remains active) and can be
messages are displayed.
reviewed from the ⬙Messages⬙ main menu item. As long
3. The reconfigurable telltales section below the odom- as there is a stored message, an ⬙i⬙ will be displayed in the
EVIC’s compass/outside temp line. Examples of this
eter line.
message type are ⬙Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out⬙
and ⬙Low Tire Pressure⬙.
4
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Unstored Messages
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in the
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
middle, and red telltales on the left.
condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples
of this message type are ⬙Turn Signal On⬙ (if a turn signal When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays
is left on) and ⬙Lights On⬙ (if driver leaves the vehicle). the following messages:
• Unstored Messages Until RUN
Remote start aborted — Door ajar
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start Remote start aborted — Hood ajar
feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition
Remote start aborted — L/Gate ajar
is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are
⬙Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar⬙ and ⬙Press Brake Remote start aborted — Fuel low
Pedal and Push Button to Start⬙.
Remote start disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
• Five Second Unstored Messages
Remote start active — Push Start Button
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of message
takes control of the main display area for five seconds and Vehicle Not in Park
then returns to the previous screen. Examples of this mes- Key Left Vehicle
sage type are ⬙Memory System Unavailable - Not in Park⬙
Key Not Detected
and ⬙Automatic High Beams On⬙.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start
Service Keyless System
Service TPM System (with a single chime). Refer to
information on “Tire Pressure Monitor” in “Starting And
Operating”
Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime if the
Channel # Transmit
vehicle is driven more than 1 mile [1.6 km] with either
turn signal on)
Channel # Training
Lamp Out (with vehicle graphic showing which of the 4 Channel # Trained
turn signals is/are out).
Clearing Channels
Key Battery Low (with a single chime)
Channels Cleared
Left/Right Front Door Ajar (one or more doors open,
Did Not Train
with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph [1.6 km/ h])
Check Gascap (refer to “Adding Fuel” in “Starting And
Low Washer Fluid (with a single chime)
Operating”)
Low Tire Pressure (with a single chime). Refer to inforOil Change Due (with a single chime)
mation on “Tire Pressure” and “Tire Pressure Monitor” in
“Starting And Operating”
4
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
EVIC White Indicators
This area will show reconfigurable white caution telltales. These telltales include:
• Shift Lever Status
• Electronic Speed Control SET
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is SET. For further information,
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
The shift lever status “P,R,N,D,L,5,4,3,2,1” are displayed
indicating the shift lever position. Telltales “5,4,3,2,1” EVIC Amber Indicators
indicate the Autostick™ feature has been engaged and This area will show reconfigurable amber caution tellthe gear selected is displayed. For further information on tales. These telltales include:
Autostick™ , refer to “Starting And Operating.”
• Low Fuel Light
• Electronic Speed Control ON
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal
This light will turn on when the electronic
(11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
speed control is ON. For further information, fuel is added.
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
EVIC Red Indicators
• Oil Pressure Warning Light
This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. These
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the
telltales include:
light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off
the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound for
• Door Ajar
four minutes when this light turns on.
This light will turn on to indicate that one or
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
more doors may be ajar.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single
• Charging System Light
chime.
This light shows the status of the electrical charg• Liftgate Ajar
ing system. The light should come on when the
This indicator will turn when the liftgate is ajar.
ignition switch is first turned ON/RUN and remain on
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on
while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
chime.
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle).
4
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is
flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is
required. You may experience reduced performance, an
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
require towing.
• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
• Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
This light warns of an overheated engine condiElectronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge aplight will come on when the ignition is first
proaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single
turned to ON/RUN and remain on briefly as a
chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. Further
bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting,
overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool.
engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is
placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.
If the charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for more information.
• Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that the transmission fluid
temperature is running hot. This may occur
with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this
light turns on, safely pull over and stop the
vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and
run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire.
4
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Oil Change Due
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will
flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds
after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. To
turn off the message temporarily, press and release the
MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system
(after performing the scheduled maintenance), perform
the following procedure:
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Fuel Economy
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Fuel
Economy” displays highlighted in the EVIC and press
the SELECT button. The following Fuel Economy functions will display in the EVIC:
• Average Fuel Economy
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
• Distance To Empty (DTE)
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine.)
• Miles Per Gallon (MPG)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
Average Fuel Economy
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. When
the fuel economy is reset, the display will read “RESET” or
show dashes for two seconds. Then, the history information
will be erased, and the averaging will continue from the last
fuel average reading before the reset.
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the SELECT
button.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
to a “LOW FUEL” message. This display will continue
until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant
amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW
FUEL” message and a new DTE value will display.
Fuel Economy
4
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Miles Per Gallon (MPG)
Trip Info
This display shows the instantaneous MPG in bar graph
form while driving. This will monitor the gas mileage in
real-time as you drive and can be used to modify driving
habits in order to increase fuel economy.
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Trip
Info” displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the
SELECT button. Pressing the SELECT button with ⬙Trip
Info⬙ highlighted will cause the EVIC display to show
Trip A, Trip B, and Elapsed Time all in one display. If you
want to reset one of the three functions you use the UP or
DOWN buttons to highlight (select) the feature that you
want to reset. Pressing the SELECT button will cause the
selected feature to reset individually. The three features
can only be reset individually. The following Trip functions display in the EVIC:
Vehicle Speed
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle
Speed” displays highlighted in the EVIC. Press the
SELECT button to display the current speed in mph
or km/h. Pressing the SELECT button a second time will
toggle the unit of measure between mph or km/h.
NOTE: Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle • Trip A
Speed menu will not change the unit of measure in the
• Trip B
EVIC.
• Elapsed Time
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa- Tire PSI
tion:
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Tire
PSI:” displays highlighted in the EVIC. Press the SELECT
Trip A
button to view a graphic of the vehicle with a tire
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
pressure value at each corner of the graphic.
reset.
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
Trip B
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
Info” displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button.
reset.
Press the UP and DOWN button to scroll through the
Elapsed Time
available information displays.
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset. • Coolant Temp
Elapsed time will increment when the ignition is in the
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
ON/RUN position.
• Oil Temperature
To Reset The Display
Displays the actual oil temperature.
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being
displayed. Press and release the SELECT button once to
clear the resettable function.
4
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Oil Pressure
Turn Menu OFF
Displays the actual oil pressure.
Displays the actual transmission temperature.
Select from Main Menu using the DOWN button. Pressing the SELECT button blanks the menu display. Pressing
any one of the four steering wheel buttons brings the
menu back.
• Engine Hours
Uconnect® SETTINGS
• Trans Temperature
Displays the number of hours of engine operation.
The Uconnect® system uses a combination of soft and
hard keys located on the center of the instrument panel
Messages
that allows you to access and change the customer
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Mes- programmable features.
sages: XX” displays highlighted in the EVIC. If there is
more than one message, pressing the SELECT button will Hard-Keys
display a stored warning message. Press and release the Hard-Keys are located on the left and right side of the
UP and DOWN buttons if there is more than one message Uconnect® 4.3 screen. In addition, there is a Scroll/Enter
to step through the remaining stored messages. If there control knob located on the right side of the Climate
are no message, pressing the SELECT button will do Controls in the center of the instrument panel. Turn the
nothing.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
control knob to scroll through menus and change settings NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
(i.e., 30, 60, 90), press the center of the control knob one or time.
more times to select or change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Soft-Keys
Soft-Keys are accessible on the Uconnect® Touchscreen.
Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect® 4.3 Settings
4
In this mode the Uconnect® system allows you to access
programmable features that may be equipped such as
Display, Clock, Safety/Assistance, Lights, Doors &
Locks, Heated Seats, Engine Off Operation, Compass
Settings, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth® and SIRIUS Setup
through hard-keys and soft-keys.
1 — Uconnect® 4.3 Settings Hard-Key
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press the ⬙Settings⬙ hard-key to access the Settings screen,
use the Page Up/Down soft-keys to scroll through the
following settings. Touch the desired setting soft-key to
change the setting using the description shown on the
following pages for each setting.
Display
• Brightness
Touch the Brightness soft-key to change this display.
When in this display, you may select display brightness
with the headlights on and the headlights off. Adjust the
brightness with the + and – setting soft-keys or by
selecting any point on the scale between the + and –
soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
• Mode
Touch the Mode soft-key to change this display. When in
this display, you may select one of the auto display
settings. To change Mode status press and release the
Day, Night or Auto soft-key, then by touch the arrow back
soft-key.
Uconnect® 4.3 Soft-Keys
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
• Language
• Voice Response
Touch the Language soft-key to change this display.
When in this display, you may select one of three
languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Touch
the English, French (Français) or Spanish (Español) softkey to select the language preferred. Then touch the
arrow back soft-key. As you continue, the information
will display in the selected language.
Touch the Voice Response soft-key to change the Voice
Response Length settings. To change the Voice Response
Length, press and release the Brief or Long soft-key. Then
touch the arrow back soft-key.
• Touch Screen Beep
Touch the Touch Screen Beep soft-key to turn on or shut
off the sound heard when a touch screen button (softkey) is pressed. To change the Touch Screen Beep setting
• Units
press and release the ON or OFF soft-key, then touch the
Touch the Units soft-key to change this display. When in arrow back soft-key.
this display, you may switch the EVIC, odometer, and
navigation system (if equipped) between US and Metric
units of measure. Touch US or Metric then touch the
arrow back soft-key. As you continue, the information
will display in the selected units of measure.
4
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Clock
• Sync Time — If Equipped
• Set Time
Touch the Sync Time soft-key to change this display.
When in this display, you may have the radio set the time
automatically. To change the Sync Time setting, press and
release the ON or OFF soft-key. Then touch the arrow
back soft-key.
Touch the Set Time soft-key to change this display. When
in this display, you may select the time display settings.
To make your selection, touch the Set Time soft-key,
adjust the hours and minutes using the up and down
soft-keys, select AM or PM, select 12 hr or 24 hr. Then Safety / Assistance
touch the arrow back soft-key when all selections are
• Park Assist
complete.
Touch the Park Assist soft-key to change this display. The
• Show Time Status
Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the
Touch the Show Time Status soft-key to change this vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE
display. When in this display, you may turn on or shut off and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). The
the digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show system can be enabled with Sound Only, Sound and
Time Status setting, press and release the ON or OFF Display, or turned OFF. To change the Park Assist status,
soft-key. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
press and release the OFF, Sound Only or Sounds and
Display soft-key. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
Refer to “ParkSense® Rear Park Assist” in “Understand- the doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry
ing The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function (RKE) transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach
status, touch the 0, 30, 60 or 90 soft-key. Then touch the
and operating information.
arrow back soft-key.
• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
• Headlights With Wipers
Touch the Hill Start Assist soft-key to change this display.
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA) Touch the Headlights With Wipers soft-key to change this
system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control display. When this feature is selected, and the headlight
System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function switch is in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn
and operating information. To make your selection, touch on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned
the Hill Start Assist soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then on. The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
touch the arrow back soft-key.
your selection, touch the Headlights With Wipers softLights
key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the arrow back
• Illuminated Approach
soft-key.
Touch the Illuminated Approach soft-key to change this
display. When this feature is selected, the headlights will
activate and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when
4
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Auto High Beams “SmartBeams™”
• Steering Directed Lights — If Equipped
Touch the Auto High Beams soft-key to change this
display. When this feature is selected, the high beam
headlights will deactivate automatically under certain
conditions. To make your selection, touch the Auto High
Beams soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the
arrow back soft-key. Refer to “Lights/SmartBeam™ — If
Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Touch the Steering Directed Lights soft-key to change this
display. When this feature is selected, the headlights turn
relative to a change in direction of the steering wheel. To
make your selection, touch the Steering Directed Lights
soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the arrow
back soft-key.
• Daytime Running Lights — If Available
Touch the Flash Headlights With Lock soft-key to change
this display. When this feature is selected, the headlights
will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature
may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock
feature selected. To make your selection, touch the Flash
Headlights With Lock soft-key and select ON or OFF.
Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
Touch the Daytime Running Lights soft-key to change
this display. When this feature is selected, the headlights
will turn on whenever the engine is running. To make
your selection, touch the Daytime Running Lights softkey and select ON or OFF. Then touch the arrow back
soft-key.
• Flash Lights With Lock
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
Doors & Locks
• Flash Lights With Lock
• Auto Unlock On Exit
Touch the Flash Lights With Lock soft-key to change this
display. When this feature is selected, the front and rear
turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or
unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. To make your selection, touch the Flash Lights With
Lock soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the
arrow back soft-key.
Touch the Auto Unlock On Exit soft-key to change this
display. When this feature is selected, all doors will
unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission
is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s
door is opened. To make your selection, touch the Auto
Unlock On Exit soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then
touch the arrow back soft-key.
• Sound Horn With Remote Start
• Auto Lock
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h). To make your selection, touch the Auto Lock
soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
indicating that the setting has been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
Touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft-key to
change this display. When this feature is selected, the
horn will sound when the remote start is activated. To
make your selection, touch the Sound Horn With Remote
Start soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the
arrow back soft-key.
4
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Sounds Horn With Lock
Touch the Sounds Horn With Lock soft-key to change this
display. When this feature is selected, the horn will chirp
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. To make your selection,
touch the Sounds Horn With Lock soft-key and select ON
or OFF. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
• Remote Door Unlock Order
Touch the Remote Door Unlock Order soft-key to change
this display. When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press
is selected, only the driver’s door will unlock on the first
press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
UNLOCK button. When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st
Press is selected, you must press the RKE transmitter
UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press is selected, all of the
doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter
UNLOCK button.
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo® (Passive Entry) and the EVIC is programmed to
Unlock All Doors On 1st Press, all doors will unlock no
matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is
grasped. If Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is
programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when
the driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if
Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is programmed,
touching the handle more than once will only result in
the driver’s door opening. If Unlock Driver Door Only
On 1st Press is selected, once the driver door is opened,
the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to
unlock all the doors (or use the RKE transmitter).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
• Passive Entry (Keyless Enter-N-Go®)
Engine Off Options
Touch the Passive Entry soft-key to change this display.
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) without having to press the RKE transmitter lock
or unlock buttons. To make your selection, touch the
Passive Entry soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch
the arrow back soft-key. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
• Headlight Off Delay
Heated Seats
• Engine Off Power Delay
• Auto Heated Seats — If Equipped
Touch the Auto Heated Seats soft-key to change this
display. When the temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C)
the Driver’s heated seat will turn on. To make your
selection, touch the Auto Heated Seats soft-key and select
ON or OFF. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
Touch the Headlight Off Delay soft-key to change this
display. When this feature is selected, the driver can
choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or
90 seconds when exiting the vehicle. To change the
Headlight Off Delay status, touch the 0, 30, 60 or 90
soft-key. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
Touch the Engine Off Power Delay soft-key to change this
display. When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect® phone system (if equipped),
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
4
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
Engine Off Power Delay status, touch the 0 seconds, 45
seconds, 5 minutes or 10 minutes soft-key. Then touch the
arrow back soft-key.
Compass Settings
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of
the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones,
Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
module is located, and it can cause interference with the
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
• Variance
Touch the Variance soft-key to change this display. Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North
and Geographic North. To compensate for the differences,
the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is
driven, per the zone map. Once properly set, the compass
will automatically compensate for the differences, and
provide the most accurate compass heading.
Compass Variance Map
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
• Calibration
Audio
Touch the Calibration soft-key to change this setting. This
compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to
manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is new, the
compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display
CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may also
calibrate the compass by touching the ON soft-key and
completing one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free
from large metal or metallic objects) until the CAL
indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off. The compass
will now function normally.
• Equalizer
Touch the Equalizer soft-key to change this display.
When in this display, you may adjust the Bass, Mid and
Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the + and –
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back
soft-key.
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your
finger up or down to change the setting as well as press
directly on the desired setting.
NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and an
environment free from large metallic objects such as build- • Balance / Fade
ings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks, etc.
Touch the Balance / Fade soft-key to change this display.
When in this display, you may adjust the Balance and
Fade settings.
4
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Speed Adjusted Volume
SIRIUS Setup
Touch the Speed Adjusted Volume soft-key to change this
display. This feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted
Volume, press the OFF, 1, 2 or 3 soft-key. Then touch the
arrow back soft-key.
• Channel Skip
• Surround Sound — If Equipped
Touch the Surround Sound soft-key to change this display. This feature provides simulated surround sound
mode. To make your selection, press the Surround Sound
soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the arrow
back soft-key.
Phone / Bluetooth®
• Paired Devices
SIRIUS can be programmed to designate a group of
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
your selection, touch the Channel Skip soft-key, select the
channels you would like to skip. Then touch the arrow
back soft-key.
• Subscription Info
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SIRIUS Satellite Radio with
your radio. Following the expiration of the free services,
it will be necessary to access the information on the
Subscription Information screen in order to re-subscribe.
Touch the Subscription Info soft-key to access the SubThis feature shows which phones are paired to the
scription Information screen.
Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer
to the Uconnect® Supplement.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on time.
the screen or visit the provider online.
When making a selection, touch the soft-key to enter the
desired mode. Once in the desired mode touch and
NOTE: SIRIUS Travel Link is a separate subscription.
release the preferred setting until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that setting has been seCustomer Programmable Features — Uconnect®
lected.
System 8.4 Settings
Touch the More soft-key, then touch the Settings soft-key
to display the menu setting screen. In this mode the
Uconnect® system allows you to access programmable
features that may be equipped such as Display, Clock,
Safety/Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On
Comfort & Remote Start, Engine Off Operation, Compass
Settings, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth® and SIRIUS Setup.
Once the setting is complete touch the Back Arrow
soft-key to return to the previous menu or touch the X
soft-key to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the
Up or Down Arrow soft-keys on the right side of the
screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the
available settings.
4
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Display
• Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
After pressing the Display soft-key the following settings When in this display, you may select the brightness with
will be available.
the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the + and –
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
• Display Mode
between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back
When in this display you may select one of the auto soft-key.
display settings. To change Mode status, touch and
release the Day, Night or Auto soft-key. Then touch the • Set Language
arrow back soft-key.
When in this display, you may select one of three
languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Touch
When in this display, you may select the brightness with the Set Language soft-key and then touch the desired
the headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the + and – language soft-key until a check-mark appears next to the
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale language, showing that setting has been selected. Touch
between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
soft-key.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
• Units
• Touchscreen Beep
When in this display, you may select to have the EVIC,
odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) changed
between US and Metric units of measure. Touch US or
Metric until a check-mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
sound heard when a touch screen button (soft-key) is
pressed. Touch the Touchscreen Beep soft-key until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
• Voice Response Length
• Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If Equipped
When in this display, you may change the Voice Response Length settings. To change the Voice Response
Length, touch the Brief or Detailed soft-key until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions
will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a
designated turn within a programmed route. To make
your selection, touch the Navigation Turn-By-Turn In
Cluster soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
4
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Fuel Saver Display In Cluster — If Equipped
• Set Time Hours
The “ECO” message is located in the instrument cluster
display, this message can be turned on or off. To make
your selection, touch the Fuel Saver Display soft-key,
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
that setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow
soft-key to return to the previous menu.
When in this display, you may adjust the hours. The Sync
with GPS Time soft-key must be unchecked. To make
your selection touch the + or - soft-keys to adjust the
hours up or down. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu or touch the X soft-key to
close out of the settings screen.
Clock
• Set Time Minutes
After pressing the Clock soft-key the following settings When in this display, you may adjust the minutes. The
will be available.
Sync with GPS Time soft-key must be unchecked. To
make your selection touch the + or - soft-keys to adjust
• Sync with GPS Time — If Equipped
the minutes up or down. Touch the back arrow soft-key
When in this display, you may automatically have the to return to the previous menu or touch the X soft-key to
radio set the time. To change the Sync with GPS Time close out of the settings screen.
setting touch the Sync with GPS Time soft-key until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
• Time Format
Safety / Assistance
When in this display, you may select the time format
display setting. Touch the Time Format soft-key until a
check-mark appears next to the 12hrs or 24hrs setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
After pressing the Safety / Assistance soft-key the following settings will be available.
• Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time
Status setting touch the Show Time in Status Bar soft-key
until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
• Park Assist
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind
the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph
(18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only,
Sound and Display, or turned OFF. To change the Park
Assist status, touch and release the OFF, Sound Only or
Sounds and Display button. Then touch the arrow back
soft-key. Refer to “ParkSense® Rear Park Assist” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and operating information.
4
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• ParkView® Backup Camera
and operating information. To make your selection, touch
the Hill Start Assist soft-key, until a check-mark appears
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
menu.
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a Lights
caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the After pressing the Lights soft-key the following settings
top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will will be available.
disappear. The ParkView® camera is located on the rear
of the vehicle above the rear License plate. To make your • Headlight Illumination On Approach
selection, touch the ParkView® Backup Camera soft-key, When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
to return to the previous menu.
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
touch the + or - soft-key to select your desired time
• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA) previous menu.
system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
• Daytime Running Lights — If Available
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is in
the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The
headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off
if they were turned on by this feature. To make your
selection, touch the Headlights With Wipers soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has
been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu.
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
touch the Daytime Running Lights soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
• Steering Directed Lights — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the headlights turn relative
to a change in direction of the steering wheel. To make
• Auto Dim High Beams “SmartBeam™” — If Equipped
your selection, touch the Steering Directed Lights softWhen this feature is selected, the high beam headlights will key, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing
deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To make
that setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow
your selection, touch the Auto High Beams soft-key, until a
soft-key to return to the previous menu.
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has
been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu. Refer to “Lights/ SmartBeam™ — If
Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
4
344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Flash Headlights With Lock
On Exit soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
When this feature is selected, the headlights will flash when
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be selected with • Auto Lock
or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make When this feature is selected, all doors will lock autoyour selection, touch the Flash Headlights with Lock soft- matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph
key, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that (24 km/h). To make your selection, touch the Auto Lock
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
return to the previous menu.
indicating that the setting has been selected. Touch the
Doors & Locks
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
After pressing the Doors & Locks soft-key the following • Flash Headlight With Lock
settings will be available.
When this feature is selected, the headlights will flash
• Auto Unlock On Exit
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. To make your selection,
touch the Flash Lights With Lock soft-key, until a checkthe vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has
opened. To make your selection, touch the Auto Unlock been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to
the previous menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345
• Sound Horn With Lock
• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
touch the Sound Horn With Lock soft-key, until a checkmark appears next to setting, showing that setting has
been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to
the previous menu.
When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is selected,
only the driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, you must
press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to
unlock the passenger’s doors. When Unlock All Doors
On 1st Press is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the
first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.
• Sound Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed to Unlock All Doors
1st Press, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive
Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If Driver Door
1st Press is programmed, only the driver’s door will
unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. With Passive
4
346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Entry, if Driver Door 1st Press is programmed touching
the handle more than once will only result in the driver’s
door opening. If driver door first is selected, once the
driver door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock
switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use RKE
transmitter).
• Passive Entry
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make
your selection, touch the Passive Entry soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu. Refer to “Keyless Enter-NGo®” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle.”
Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start
After pressing the Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start
soft-key the following settings will be available.
• Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
• Auto-On Driver Heated Seat With Vehicle Start — If
Equipped
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat will
automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40° F
(4.4° C). To make your selection, touch the Auto Heated
Seats soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347
Delay status touch the + or - soft-key to select your
desired time interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
After pressing the Engine Off Options soft-key the folreturn to the previous menu.
lowing settings will be available.
Compass Settings
• Engine Off Power Delay
Engine Off Options
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect® system (if equipped), DVD
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front
door will cancel this feature. To change the Engine Off
Power Delay status touch the 0 seconds, 45 seconds, 5
minutes or 10 minutes soft-key. Then touch the arrow
back soft-key.
• Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
After pressing the Compass Settings soft-key the following settings will be available.
• Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences, and provide the most accurate compass
heading.
4
348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the
instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones, Laptop
Computers and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass module is located, and it can cause interference with
the compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
• Perform Compass Calibration
Touch the Calibration soft-key to change this setting. This
compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to
manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is new, the
compass may appear erratic and it may need to be
calibrated. You may also calibrate the compass by pressing the ON soft-key and completing one or more
360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal or
metallic objects) until the CAL indicator displayed in the
EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally.
Audio
After pressing the Audio soft-key the following settings
will be available.
• Balance/Fade
Compass Variance Map
When in this display you may adjust the Balance and
Fade settings.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349
• Equalizer
• Music Info Cleanup
When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and
Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the + and –
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back
soft-key.
This feature helps organize music files for optimized
music navigation. To make your selection, touch the
Music Info Cleanup soft-key, select On or Off followed by
pressing the arrow back soft-key.
Phone/Bluetooth®
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth® soft-key the folfinger up or down to change the setting as well as touch lowing settings will be available.
directly on the desired setting.
• Paired Devices
• Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature shows which phones are paired to the
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume to the Uconnect® Supplement.
touch the Off, 1, 2 or 3 soft-key. Then touch the arrow
SiriusXM Setup
back soft-key.
After pressing the SIRIUS Setup soft-key the following
settings will be available.
4
350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Channel Skip
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of
the screen or visit the provider online.
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription.
your selection, touch the Channel Skip soft-key, select the
channels you would like to skip followed by pressing the Uconnect® MULTIMEDIA — VIDEO
ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES™) — IF
arrow back soft-key.
EQUIPPED
• Subscription Information
Your rear seat Video Entertainment System (VES™) is
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free designed to give your family years of enjoyment. You can
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio play your favorite CDs or DVDs, listen to audio over the
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free wireless headphones, or plug and play a variety of
services, it will be necessary to access the information on standard video games or audio devices. Please review
the Subscription Information screen in order to re- this Owner’s Manual to become familiar with its features
subscribe.
and operation.
Touch the Subscription Info soft-key to access the Subscription Information screen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351
• With the ignition switch in the ON or ACC position,
turn the radio on by pushing the ON/OFF Volume
• Screen located in the overhead console: Unfold the
Control knob.
overhead LCD screen by pushing the button on the
overhead console behind the screen.
• When the Video Screen is open and a DVD is inserted
into the radio, the screen turns on automatically, the
headphone transmitters turn on and playback begins.
Getting Started
Single Video Screen
NOTE: Typically there are two different ways to operate
the features of the Video Entertainment System (VES™).
• The Remote Control
• The Touchscreen Radio (If Equipped)
Overhead Video Screen
4
352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Play A DVD
NOTE: The VES™ system will retain the last setting
when turned off.
1. Press the EJECT button on the radio faceplate (TouchPlay Video Games
screen).
2. Insert the DVD with the label facing up. The radio Connect the video game console to the Auxiliary RCA
automatically selects the appropriate mode after the input jacks located on the back of the center console.
disc is recognized and displays the menu screen or
Audio/Video RCA Jacks (AUX Jacks)
starts playing the first track.
on the rear of the center console enable
3. Ensure the VES™ Remote Control and the Headphone
switch is on Channel 1.
Using The Remote Control
1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control.
the monitor to display video directly
from a video camera, connect video
games for display on the screen, or play
music directly from an MP3 player.
1. Video in (yellow)
2. While looking at the video screen, highlight DISC by
2. Left audio in (white)
either pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by
repeatedly pressing the MODE button, then press 3. Right audio in (red)
ENTER on the Remote Control.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353
When connecting an external source to the AUX input, be Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
sure to follow the standard color coding for the VES™
1. Touch the “MORE” soft-key.
jacks:
2. Touch the “Rear Entertainment” soft-key to display
NOTE: Certain high-end video games, such as Playstathe Rear Entertainment Controls.
tion3 and XBox360 will exceed the power limit of the
vehicle’s Power Inverter. Refer to the Power Inverter 3. If the Rear Entertainment is turned off, touch the
“Power” soft-key.
section in your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual for more
information.
4. Touch the “1” or “2” soft-key for the channel desired
Ensure the remote control channel selector switch and
and press “Source” soft-key to select the desired
Headphone switch (IR channel) are the same number.
mode.
Using The Remote Control
1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control.
Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2 While A
Video Is Playing On Channel 1
Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on
2. While looking at the video screen, highlight VES AUX
Channel 2.
2, by either pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or
by repeatedly pressing the MODE button, then press
ENTER on the Remote Control.
4
354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. Touch the “1” or “2” soft-key for the channel desired
and press “Source” soft-key to select the desired
1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control and
mode.
the Mode Select Screen will display, unless a video is
playing then only a small banner will appear on the Important Notes For Single Video Screen System
bottom of the screen.
• VES™ is able to transmit two channels of stereo audio
simultaneously.
2. While looking at the video screen, either press Up/
Down/Left/Right on the Remote Control to highlight
• In split screen mode the left side equates to Channel 1
the desired audio source or repeatedly press the
and right side equates to Channel 2.
MODE button on the remote until the desired audio
• If a video source is selected on Channel 1, then
source appears on the screen.
Channel 2 is for audio only.
Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
• When selecting a video source on Channel 1, the video
1. Touch the “MORE” soft-key.
will display on the screen and the audio will be heard
2. Touch the “Rear Entertainment” soft-key to display
on Channel 1 in the headphones.
the Rear Entertainment Controls.
• Audio can be heard through the headphones even
3. If the Rear Entertainment is turned off, touch the
when the Video Screen is closed.
“Power” soft-key.
Using The Remote Control
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355
Play A DVD Using The Touchscreen Radio
NOTE:
1. Insert the DVD with the label facing up. The radio • The VES™ system will retain the last setting when
turned off.
automatically selects the appropriate mode after the
disc is recognized and displays the menu screen or
• Viewing a DVD on the Touchscreen radio screen is not
starts playing the first track.
available in some regions or locations, the vehicle must
be stopped, and the shift lever must be in the PARK
Using The Remote Control
position for vehicles with automatic transmission. In
1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control.
vehicles with manual transmission the parking brake
2. While looking at the Video Screen, highlight DISC by
must be engaged even when the vehicle is parked.
either pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by
Refer to local and state laws.
repeatedly pressing the MODE button, then press
• Touching the screen on a Touchscreen radio while a
ENTER.
DVD is playing brings up basic remote control functions for DVD play such as scene selection, Play, Pause,
FF, RW, and Stop. Pressing the X in the upper corner
will turn off the remote control screen functions.
4
356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
VES™ Remote Control — If Equipped
1. Touch the “MORE” soft-key.
2. Touch the “Rear Entertainment” soft-key to display
the Rear Entertainment Controls.
3. If the Rear Entertainment is turned off, touch the
“Power” soft-key.
4. Touch the “1” or “2” soft-key for the channel desired
and press “Source” soft-key to select the desired mode.
Remote Control
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357
5. 䉴䉴 – In radio modes, press to seek the next tunable
station. In disc modes, press and hold to fast forward
Power – Turns the screen and wireless headphone
through the current audio track or video chapter. In
transmitter for the selected Channel on or off. To hear
menu modes use to navigate in the menu.
audio while the screen is closed, press the Power button
to turn the headphone transmitter on.
6. 䉲 / Prev – In radio modes, press to select to the
previous station. In disc modes, press to advance to
Channel Selector Indicators – When a button is
the start of the current or previous audio track or
pressed, the currently affected channel or channel
video chapter. In menu modes, use to navigate in the
button is illuminated momentarily.
menu.
Light – Turns the remote control backlighting on or off.
The remote backlighting turns off automatically after 7. MENU – Press to return to the main menu of a DVD
disc, to select a satellite audio or video channel from
five seconds.
the Station list, or select playback modes (SCAN/
Channel/Screen Selector Switch - Indicates which chanRANDOM for a CD).
nel is being controlled by the remote control. When the
selector switch is in the Channel 1 position, the remote 8. 䉴 / 㥋 (Play/Pause) – Begin/resume or pause disc play.
controls the functionality of headphone Channel 1 (right 9. ▪ (Stop) – Stops disc play.
side of the screen). When the selector switch is in the
Channel 2, position the remote controls the functionality
of headphone Channel 2 (left side of the screen).
Controls And Indicators
1.
2.
3.
4.
4
358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
10. PROG Up/Down – When listening to a radio mode,
pressing PROG Up selects the next preset and pressing PROG Down selects the previous preset stored in
the radio.
11. MUTE – Press to mute the headphone audio output
for the selected channel.
is selected and the disc is stopped, press the SETUP
button to access the DVD Setup menu. (see the DVD
Setup Menu of this manual.)
16. BACK – When navigating in menu mode, press to
return to the previous screen. When navigating a
DVDs disc menu, the operation depends on the disc’s
contents.
12. SLOW – Press to slow playback of a DVD disc. Press
play (䉴) to resume normal play.
17. 䉳䉳 – In radio modes, press to seek to the previous
tunable station. In disc modes, press and hold to fast
13. STATUS – Press to display the current status.
rewind through the current audio track or video
14. MODE – Press to change the mode of the selected
chapter. In menu modes use to navigate in the menu.
channel. See the Mode Selection section of this
18. ENTER – Press to select the highlighted option in a
manual for details on changing modes.
menu.
15. SETUP – When in a video mode, press the SETUP
19. 䉱 / NEXT – In radio modes, press to select to the
button to access the display settings (see the display
next station. In disc modes, press to advance to the
settings section) to access the DVD setup menu, select
next audio track or video chapter. In menu modes,
the menu button on the radio. When a disc is loaded
use to navigate in the menu.
in the DVD player (if equipped) and the VES™ mode
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359
Remote Control Storage
The video screen(s) come with a built in storage compartment for the remote control which is accessible when the
screen is opened. To remove the remote, use your index
finger to pull and rotate the remote towards you. Do not
try to pull the remote straight down as it will be very
difficult to remove. To return the remote back into its
storage area, insert one long edge of the remote into the
two retaining clips first, and then rotate the remote back
up into the other two retaining clips until it snaps back
into position.
4
The Remote Control Storage
360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Locking The Remote Control
Replacing The Remote Control Batteries
All remote control functionality can be disabled as a The remote control requires two AAA batteries for opparental control feature.
eration. To replace the batteries:
1. Touch the “MORE” soft-key.
• Locate the battery compartment on the back of the
remote, then slide the battery cover downward.
2. Touch the “Rear Entertainment” soft-key to display
the Rear Entertainment Controls.
• Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them
according to the polarity diagram shown.
3. Touch the “Lock-out” soft-key to lock the remote
control. Pressing the “Lock-out” soft-key a second • Replace the battery compartment cover.
time will unlock the remote control.
Headphones Operation
NOTE: Remote control lock-out will only apply to the The headphones receive two separate channels of audio
current ignition cycle. The VES™ will automatically using an infrared transmitter from the video screen.
remove the lock-out if the ignition is cycled to “OFF”.
If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control,
verify that the screen is turned on and in the down
position and that the channel is not muted and the
headphone channel selector switch is on the desired
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361
channel. If audio is still not heard, check that fully Replacing The Headphone Batteries
charged batteries are installed in the headphones.
Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for
operation. To replace the batteries:
• Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup of
the headphones, and then slide the battery cover
downward.
• Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them
according to the polarity diagram shown.
• Replace the battery compartment cover.
1
2
3
4
–
–
–
–
Volume Control
Power Button
Channel Selection Switch
Power Indicator
4
362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Controls
The headphone power indicator and controls are located
on the right ear cup.
NOTE:
• When both switches are on Channel 1, the Remote is
controlling Channel 1 and the headphones are tuned
to the audio of the VES™ Channel 1.
NOTE: The rear video system must be turned on before
• When both switches are on Channel 2, the Remote is
sound can be heard from the headphones. To conserve
controlling Channel 2 and the headphones are tuned
battery life, the headphones will automatically turn off
to the audio of the VES™ Channel 2.
approximately three minutes after the rear video system
is turned off.
2. Press the MODE button on the remote control.
Changing the Audio Mode for Headphones
3. If the video screen is displaying a video source (such
as a DVD Video), pressing STATUS shows the status
1. Ensure the Remote Control channel/screen selector
on a popup banner at the bottom of the screen.
switch is in the same position as the headphone
Pressing the MODE button will advance to the next
selector switch.
mode. When the mode is in an audio only source (such
as FM), the Mode Selection menu appears on screen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363
4. When the Mode Selection menu appears on screen,
use the cursor buttons on the remote control to navigate to the available modes and press the ENTER
button to select the new mode.
5. To cancel out of the Mode Selection menu, press the
BACK button on the remote control.
Unwired® Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
Warranty
Who Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty covers
the initial user or purchaser (⬙you⬙ or ⬙your⬙) of this
particular Unwired Technology LLC (⬙Unwired⬙) wireless
headphone (⬙Product⬙). The warranty is not transferable.
How Long Does the Coverage Last? This warranty lasts
as long as you own the Product.
What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as specified
below, this warranty covers any Product that in normal
use is defective in workmanship or materials.
What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This warranty
does not cover any damage or defect that results from
misuse, abuse or modification of the Product other than
by Unwired. Foam earpieces, which will wear over time
through normal use, are specifically not covered (replacement foam is available for a nominal charge). UNWIRED
TECHNOLOGY IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY INJURIES
OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY RESULTING FROM THE USE OF, OR ANY FAILURE OR DEFECT IN, THE PRODUCT, NOR IS UNWIRED LIABLE
FOR ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR
NATURE WHATSOEVER. Some states and jurisdictions
may not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or
consequential damages, so the above limitation may not
apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal
rights. You may also have other rights, which vary from
jurisdiction to jurisdiction.
4
364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
What Will Unwired® Do? Unwired®, at its option, will System Information
repair or replace any defective Product. Unwired® reserves
Information Mode Display
the right to replace any discontinued Product with a
comparable model. THIS WARRANTY IS THE SOLE
WARRANTY FOR THIS PRODUCT, SETS FORTH YOUR
EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS, AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES
(EXPRESS OR IMPLIED), INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY
OR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
If you have any questions or comments regarding your
Unwired® wireless headphones, please phone 1-888-2933332 or email [email protected]
You may register your Unwired® wireless headphones
online at www.unwiredtechnology.com or by phone at
When information mode is active, the current mode setting
1-888-293-3332.
for both audio channels is displayed. In addition to the
items called out by number, the remaining information
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365
displays the current status of the source (such as station
frequency, name, preset or track number, song title, artist
name, album name, etc.).
Mute: when the Mute icon is displayed, the audio for
Channel 2 has been muted using the remote control’s
MUTE button.
1. Channel 1 Mode – Displays the current source for 4. Channel 2 Mode — Displays the current source for
Channel 1.
Channel 2.
2. Channel 1 Audio Only/Mute — Audio: The audio 5. Remote Locked Out—When the icon is displayed, the
only icon is not used on Channel 1, in a single screen
remote control functions are disabled.
system. Mute: when the Mute icon is displayed, the
6. Clock — Displays the time.
audio for Channel 1 has been muted using the remote
control’s MUTE button.
7. Channel 1 Shared Status — When the icon is displayed, the audio for Channel 1 is also shared with the
3. Channel 2 Audio Only/Mute — Audio: Only in a
radio and playing through the cabin speakers.
single screen system: The audio only icon is displayed
on Channel 2 when Channel 1 is in a video mode.
4
366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Numeric Keypad Menu
When the display for either Channel 1 or Channel 2
shows DIRECT TUNE, pressing the remote control’s
ENTER button activates a numeric keypad menu. This
screen makes it easy to enter a specific tuner frequency or
track number. To enter the desired digit:
1. Press the remote control’s navigation buttons (䉱, 䉲,
䉴, 䉳) to navigate to the desired digit.
2. When the digit is highlighted, press the remote control’s ENTER button to select the digit. Repeat these
steps until all digits are entered.
3. To delete the last digit, navigate to the Del button and
press the remote control’s ENTER button.
Numeric Keypad Menu
4. After all of the digits are entered, navigate to the Go
button and press the remote control’s ENTER button.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367
Station List Menu
Options Menu
When listening to Satellite audio, pressing the remote
control’s MENU button displays a list of all available
channels. Navigate this list using the remote control’s
navigation buttons to find the desired station, press the
remote control’s ENTER button to tune to that station. To
jump through the list more quickly, navigate to the Page
Up and Page Down icons on the screen.
4
Disc Menu
When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc, pressing
the remote control’s MENU button displays a list of all
commands which control playback of the disc. Using the
options you can activate or cancel Random play.
When watching a video source (DVD Video with the disc
in Play mode, Aux Video, etc.), pressing the “Options”
soft-key activates the Options Settings menu. From this
menu you can adjust Audio, Subtitles, Angle and Title.
368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Display Settings
Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed
When watching a video source (DVD Video with the disc
in Play mode, Aux Video, etc.), pressing the remote
control’s SETUP button activates the Display Settings
menu. These settings control the appearance of the video
on the screen. The factory default settings are already set
for optimum viewing, so there is no need to change these
settings under normal circumstances.
To listen to only audio portion of the channel with the
screen closed:
• Set the audio to the desired source and channel.
• Close the video screen.
• To change the current audio mode, press the remote
control’s MODE button. This will automatically select
To change the settings, press the remote control’s navithe next available audio mode without using the
gation buttons to select an item, then press the remote
MODE/SOURCE Select menu.
control’s navigation buttons to change the value for the
If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard, verify
currently selected item. To reset all values back to the
that the headphones are turned on (the ON indicator is
original settings, select the Default Settings menu option
illuminated) and the headphone selector switch is on the
and press the remote control’s ENTER button.
desired channel. If the headphones are turned on, press
the remote control’s power button to turn audio on. If
audio is still not heard, check that fully charged batteries
are installed in the headphones.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369
Disc Formats
DVD Audio Support
The DVD player is capable of playing the following types When a DVD-Audio disc is inserted in the DVD player,
of discs (12 cm or 8 cm diameter):
the DVD-Audio title on the disc is played by default
(most DVD-Audio discs also have a Video title, but the
• DVD-Video discs (MPEG-2 video compression) (see
Video title is ignored). All multi-channel program matenotes about DVD Region Codes)
rial is automatically mixed down to two channels, which
• Audio Compact Discs (CDs)
may result in a lowered apparent volume level. If you
• CD Data discs with MP3 and WMA compressed audio increase the volume level to account for this change in
level, remember to lower the volume before changing the
format files
disc or to another mode.
• Video CDs (MPEG-1 video compression)
Recorded Discs
DVD Region Codes
The DVD player will play CD-R and CD-RW discs
The DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by recorded in CD-Audio or Video-CD format, or as a
geographic region. These region codes must match in CD-ROM containing MP3 or WMA files. The player will
order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD also play DVD-Video content recorded to a DVD-R,
disc does not match the region code for the player, the DVD-RW and DVD-ROM discs.
disc will stop playing and a warning will be displayed.
4
370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If you record a disc using a personal computer, there may • The player recognizes a maximum of 512 files and 99
be cases where the DVD player may not be able to play
folders per CD-R and CD-RW disc.
some or the entire disc, even if it is recorded in a
• Mixed media recordable DVD formats will only play
compatible format and is playable on other players. To
the Video_TS portion of the disc.
help avoid playback problems, use the following guidelines when recording discs.
If you are still having trouble writing a disc that is
playable in the DVD player, check with the disc recording
• Open sessions are ignored. Only sessions that are
software publisher for more information about burning
closed are playable.
playable discs.
• For multi-session CDs that contain only multiple CDThe recommended method for labeling recordable discs
Audio sessions, the player will renumber the tracks so
(CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R and DVD-RW) is with a permaeach track number is unique.
nent marker. Do not use adhesive labels as they may
• For CD Data (or CD-ROM) discs, always use the separate from the disc, become stuck, and cause permaISO-9660 (Level 1 or Level 2), Joliet, or UDF format. nent damage to the DVD player.
CD-DA may also be used for PCM Audio contained on
CD-Based Data.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371
• Any file that is copy protected (such as those downloaded from many online music stores) will not play.
The DVD player is capable of playing MP3 (MPEG-1
The DVD player will automatically skip the file and
Audio Layer 3 with data bitrates from 32 to 320 kbit/s,
begin playing the next available file.
including variable bit rates), WMA (All Standard 8.x, 9.x
Windows Media Audio) and ACC (MPEG-4 audio; sam- • Other compression formats such as AAC, MP3 Pro,
Ogg Vorbis, and ATRAC3 will not play. The DVD
pling frequencies 8 to 48 kHz; mono and stereo) audio
player will automatically skip the file and begin playfiles with the from a CD Data disc (usually a CD-R or
CD-RW).
ing the next available file.
Compressed Audio Files (MP3, WMA AND ACC)
• The DVD player always uses the file extension to • If you are creating your own files, the recommended
fixed bit rate for MP3 files is between 96 and 192Kbps
determine the audio format, so MP3 files must always
end with the extension ⬙.mp3⬙ or ⬙.MP3⬙, WMA files
and the recommended fixed bit rate for WMA files is
between 64 and 192Kbps. Variable bit rates are also
must always end with the extension ⬙.wma⬙ or ⬙WMA⬙,
supported. For both formats, the recommended
and ACC files must end with the extensions “.acc” or
“.m4a”. To prevent incorrect playback, do not use
sample rate is either 44.1kHz or 48kHz.
these extensions for any other types of files.
• To change the current file, use the remote control’s or
DVD player’s 䉱 button to advance to the next file, or
• For MP3 files, ID3 tag data v1, v1.1, v2 and v2.4 (such
as artist name, track title, album, etc.) are supported.
the 䉲 button to return to the start of the current or
previous file.
4
372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• To change the current directory, use the remote con- The DVD player may shut down during extremely hot
trol’s PROG UP and Down buttons or Rewind/skip conditions, such as when the vehicle’s interior temperature is above 120°F (49°C). When this occurs, the DVD
back and fast fwd/skip forward.
player will display ⬙High Temp⬙ and will shut off the
Disc Errors
display until a safe temperature is reached. This shutIf the DVD player is unable to read the disc, a ⬙Disc Error⬙ down is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD
message is displayed on the Radio display and the disc is player.
automatically ejected. A dirty, damaged, or incompatible
Product Agreement
disc format are all potential causes for a ⬙Disc Error⬙
This product incorporates copyright protection technolmessage.
ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellecIf a disc has a damaged track which results in audible or tual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
visible errors that persists for 2.0 seconds, the DVD technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
player will attempt to continue playing the disc by intended for home or other limited viewing uses otherskipping forward 1.0 to 3.0 seconds at a time. If the end wise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or
of the disc is reached, the DVD player will return to the disassembly is prohibited.
beginning of the disc and attempt to play the start of the
first track.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373
Dolby® Digital and MLP Lossless Manufactured
under license from Dolby Laboratories. ⬙Dolby⬙,
⬙MLP Lossless⬙, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works. Copyright 1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved.
iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL
This feature allows an iPod® or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port.
iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod®
and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions
General Information
may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please
This system complies with Part 15 of the FCC Operation visit Apple’s website for software updates.
is subject to the following two conditions:
For further information, refer to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
4
374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
Right-Hand Switch Functions
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear • Press the top of the switch to increase the volume.
surface of the steering wheel. The left and right-hand
• Press the bottom of the switch to decrease the volume.
controls are rocker-type switches with a pushbutton in
the center of each switch. Reach behind the steering • Press the button in the center of the switch to change
wheel to access the switches.
modes (i.e., AM, FM, etc.).
Left-Hand Switch Functions For Radio Operation
• Press the top of the switch to SEEK the next listenable
station up from the current setting.
• Press the bottom of the switch to SEEK the next
listenable station down from the current setting.
• Press the button in the center of the switch to tune to
the next preset that you have programmed.
Remote Sound Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375
Left-Hand Switch Functions For Media (i.e., CD)
Operation
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
• Press the top of the switch once to listen to the next precautions:
track.
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
• Press the bottom of the switch once either to listen to
the beginning of the current track or to listen to the
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
beginning of the previous track if it is within eight
wiping from center to edge.
seconds after the current track begins to play.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch• Press the switch up or down twice to listen to the
ing the disc.
second track, three times to listen to the third track,
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
and so forth.
or anti-static sprays.
• Press the button located in the center of the switch to
change to the next preset that you have programmed. 5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
4
376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather. This
system can be operated through either the instrument
panel or through the Uconnect® system display.
When the Uconnect® system is in different modes (RaUnder certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in dio, Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and passenger
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated display.
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
not using Uconnect® (if equipped).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377
Manual Climate Controls With Touchscreen — If
Equipped
Hard-Keys
Hard-keys are located on the left and right side of the
Uconnect® 4.3 screen in the center of the instrument
panel. There are also hard-keys located below the
Uconnect® touch screen.
4
Uconnect® 4.3 Manual with Touchscreen Climate
Hard-Key
378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Soft-Keys
Soft-keys are accessible on the Uconnect® system screen.
Manual Temperature Controls — Hard-Keys
Uconnect® 4.3 Manual 3 — Zone Temperature Controls
— Soft-Keys
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Hard-keys And
Soft-keys)
1. MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator
will turn off.
2. A/C Button
Uconnect® 8.4 Manual 3 — Zone Temperature Controls
— Soft-Keys
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
3. Recirculation Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON.
4
380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side
window demist outlets. When the defrost button is
selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode
with maximum temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing
this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual
mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate
system will return the previous setting.
5. Rear Defrost Button
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 10 minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381
6. Rear Climate Button — If Equipped
8. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
(Uconnect® 8.4 Only)
Press and release this button to turn on the rear climate
controls. The indicator will illuminate when the rear Provides the passenger with independent temperature
climate controls are ON. Performing this function again control. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
will turn OFF the rear climate controls.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
7. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
automatically exit Sync.
(Uconnect® 8.4 Only)
9. SYNC
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
Press the Sync soft-key to toggle the Sync feature On/Off.
control. Push the button for warmer temperature setThe Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is
tings.
enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will temperature setting with the driver temperature setting.
automatically exit Sync.
Changing the passenger temperature setting while in
Sync will automatically exit this feature.
4
382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
10. Blower Control
11. Modes
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
forced through the climate system. There are seven
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
speeds can be selected using either hard-keys or soft-keys
as follows:
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
demist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings are
as follows:
• Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of
the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up
and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to
shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these
outlets.
• Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and
floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister
outlets.
Hard-Key
The blower speed increases as you turn the control
clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
speed decreases as you turn the knob counterclockwise.
Soft-Key
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
warmer air from the floor outlets.
• Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount
of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
• Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or
snowy conditions.
12. Climate Control OFF Button
13. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
(Uconnect® 8.4 Only)
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
time.
14. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
(Uconnect® 8.4 Only)
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button for warmer temperature settings.
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
ON/OFF.
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
time.
4
384 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
15. Temperature Control (Uconnect® 4.3 Only)
NOTE:
Press the driver or passenger temperature soft-key to • For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix,
regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger
Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but
compartment. Moving the temperature bar into the red
the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging
area, indicates warmer temperatures. Moving the temof the windows.
perature bar into the blue area indicates cooler tempera• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
tures. Driver and passenger have independent temperaselect Defrost mode and increase blower speed.
ture control if Sync mode is not illuminated.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
Climate Control Functions
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (loA/C (Air Conditioning)
cated in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to
the front of the radiator and through the condenser.
manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system.
When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool dehu- MAX A/C
midified air will flow through the outlets into the cabin. For
improved fuel economy, press the A/C button to turn off the MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perforair conditioning and manually adjust the blower and airflow mance.
mode settings. Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level
or Floor modes.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
prior settings. The soft-key illuminates when MAX A/C lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation feature
is ON.
may be unavailable (soft button greyed out). The Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
window clearing operation. Recirculation will be disabled
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting to use
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the
Recirculation while in this mode will cause the LED in the
selected setting and MAX A/C to exit.
control button to blink and then turn off.
Recirculation Control
Rear Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If
Equipped
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
The rear MTC system has floor air outlets at the rear right
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
side of the 3rd Row seats and overhead outlets at each
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
outboard rear seating position. The system provides
pressing the Recirculation control button. The
heated air through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified
recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is
air through the headliner outlets.
selected. Push the button a second time to turn off the
Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle. The rear system temperature control soft-keys are located
in the Uconnect® touch system, located on the instrument panel.
4
386 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect® 4.3 Manual Rear Climate Soft-Key Controls
Screen
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Blower Up Soft-Key
Mode Soft-Key
Temperature Soft-Key
Blower Down Soft-Key
5 — Done Soft-Key
6 — Rear Lock Soft-Key
7 — Rear Off Soft-Key
Uconnect® 8.4 Manual Rear Climate Soft-Key Controls
Screen
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Rear Lock Soft-Key
Front Climate Control Soft-Key
Temperature Up Soft-Key
Temperature Down Soft-Key
5 — Blower Up Soft-Key
6 — Mode Soft-Key
7 — Blower Down
Soft-Key
8 — Rear Off Soft-Key
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls From The
Front Uconnect® Touchscreen
The Three-Zone climate control system allows for adjustment of the rear climate controls from the front ATC
panel.
Rear Lock
• Pressing the Rear Temperature Lock soft-key on the
Uconnect® touchscreen, illuminates a lock symbol in
the rear display. The rear temperature and air source
are controlled from the front Uconnect® system.
• Rear occupants can only adjust the rear control when
the Rear Temperature Lock button is turned off.
• Press ⬙REAR⬙ button to change control to rear control
mode, Rear display (below) will appear. Control func- • The rear MTC is located in the headliner, near the
tions now operate rear system.
center of the vehicle.
To change the rear system settings:
• To return to Front screen, press ⬙REAR⬙ button again,
or it will revert to the Front screen after six seconds.
4
388 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Rear Blower Control
The rear blower control knob can be manually set to off,
or any fixed blower speed, by rotating the knob from low
to high. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Rear MTC Control Features
1 – Blower Speed
2 – Rear Temperature
3 – Rear MODE
4 – Rear Temperature Lock
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature
Control System through an intake grille, located in
the right side trim panel. The rear outlets are located
in the right side trim panel. Do not block or place
objects directly in front of the inlet grille or heater
outlets. The electrical system could overload causing
damage to the blower motor.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 389
Rear Temperature Control
Bi-Level Mode
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle,
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the
rotate the temperature knob counterclockwise to lower
floor outlets.
the temperature, and clockwise to increase the temperaNOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level
ture. The rear temperature settings are displayed in the
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headUconnect® system.
liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
When rear controls are locked by the Uconnect® system,
Floor Mode
the Rear Temperature Lock symbol on the temperature
Air comes from the floor outlets.
knob is illuminated and any rear overhead adjustments
are ignored.
Rear Mode Control
Headliner Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each
of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets
to one side will shut off the airflow.
4
390 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) With
Touchscreen — If Equipped
Hard-Keys
Hard-keys are located on the left and right side of the
Uconnect® 4.3 screen in the center of the instrument
panel. There are also hard-keys located below the
Uconnect® touch screen.
Uconnect® 4.3 Automatic Climate Hard-Key
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 391
Soft-Keys
Soft-keys are accessible on the Uconnect® system screen.
4
Automatic Temperature Controls — Hard-Keys
Uconnect® 4.3 Automatic 3 — Zone Temperature
Controls — Soft-Keys
392 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Hard-keys And
Soft-keys)
1. MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator
will turn off.
2. A/C Button
Uconnect® 8.4 Automatic 3 — Zone Temperature
Controls — Soft-Keys
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
3. Recirculation Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 393
4. AUTO Operation Button
6. Rear Defrost Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by
adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing
this function will cause the ATC to switch between
manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic
Operation” for more information.
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 10 minutes.
5. Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side
window demist outlets. When the defrost button is
selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode
with maximum temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing
this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual
mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate
system will return the previous setting.
4
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
(Continued)
394 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
9. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
7. Rear Climate Button — If Equipped
10. SYNC
Press and release this button to turn on the rear climate
controls. The indicator will illuminate when the rear
climate controls are ON. Performing this function again
will turn OFF the rear climate controls.
Press the Sync soft-key to toggle the Sync feature On/Off.
The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is
enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger
temperature setting with the driver temperature setting.
Changing the passenger temperature setting while in
Sync will automatically exit this feature.
8. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
11. Blower Control
control. Push the button for warmer temperature setBlower control is used to regulate the amount of air
tings.
forced through the climate system. There are seven
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
automatically exit Sync.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 395
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The • Panel Mode
speeds can be selected using either hard-keys or soft-keys
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
as follows:
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of
Hard-key
the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up
The blower speed increases as you turn the control and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to
speed decreases as you turn the knob counterclockwise. shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these
outlets.
Soft-key
• Bi-Level Mode
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
through the defrost and side window demister
area between the icons.
outlets.
12. Modes
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conThe airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, warmer air from the floor outlets.
demist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings are
as follows:
4
396 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount
of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
• Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or
snowy conditions.
13. Climate Control OFF Button
15. Driver Temperature Control Up Button
Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Push the button for warmer temperature settings.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
time.
16. Temperature Control (Uconnect® 4.3 Only)
Press the driver or passenger temperature soft-key to
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger
compartment. Moving the temperature bar into the red
ON/OFF.
area, indicates warmer temperatures. Moving the tem14. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
perature bar into the blue area indicates cooler temperaProvides the driver with independent temperature con- tures. Driver and passenger have independent temperature control if Sync mode is not illuminated.
trol. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
time.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 397
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling performance. Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and
the prior settings. The soft-key illuminates when MAX
A/C is ON.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
adjusted to desired user settings.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation feature
may be unavailable (soft button greyed out). The Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve
window clearing operation. Recirculation will be disabled
automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting to use
Recirculation while in this mode will cause the LED in the
control button to blink and then turn off.
Pressing other settings will cause the MAX A/C operation Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
to switch to the prior settings and the MAX A/C indicator
Automatic Operation
will turn off.
Recirculation Control
1. Press the AUTO hard-key or soft-key button (4) on the
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high
humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired, you may 2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the system
wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the
to maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger temRecirculation control button. The recirculation
perature hard or soft control buttons (7, 8, 13, 14). Once
indicator will illuminate when this button is selected. Push
the desired temperature is displayed, the system will
achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level.
the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode
and allow outside air into the vehicle.
4
398 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
system to function automatically.
Manual Operation Override
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at
a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This
allows the front occupants to control the volume of air
circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable
feature. Refer to the “Uconnect® System Settings” in
this section of the manual.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C
operation and Recirculation control can also be manually
selected in Manual operation.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
The system allows for manual selection of blower speed,
air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation control.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 399
Rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
The rear ATC system has floor air outlets at the rear right
side of the 3rd Row seats and overhead outlets at each
outboard rear seating position. The system provides
heated air through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified
air through the headliner outlets.
4
The rear system temperature control soft-keys are located
in the Uconnect® touch system, located on the instrument panel.
Uconnect® 4.3 Automatic Rear Climate Soft-Key
Controls Screen
1
3
5
7
—
—
—
—
Blower Up Soft-Key
Temperature Soft-Key
Done Soft-Key
Rear Auto Soft-Key
2
4
6
8
—
—
—
—
Mode Soft-Key
Blower Down Soft-Key
Rear Lock Soft-Key
Rear Off Soft-Key
400 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls From The
Front ATC Panel
The Three-Zone ATC system allows for adjustment of the
rear climate controls from the front ATC panel.
To change the rear system settings:
• Press ⬙REAR⬙ button to change control to rear control
mode, Rear display (below) will appear. Control functions now operate rear system.
• To return to Front screen, press ⬙REAR⬙ button again,
or it will revert to the Front screen after six seconds.
Uconnect® 8.4 Automatic Rear Climate Soft-Key
Controls Screen
1—
3—
5—
Key
7—
9—
Rear Auto Soft-Key
Front Climate Soft-Key
Temperature Down SoftMode Soft-Key
Rear Off Soft-Key
2
4
6
8
—
—
—
—
Rear Lock Soft-Key
Temperature Up Soft-Key
Blower Up Soft-Key
Blower Down Soft-Key
Rear Lock
Pressing the Rear Temperature Lock soft-key on the
Uconnect® touchscreen, illuminates a lock symbol in the
rear display. The rear temperature and air source are
controlled from the front Uconnect® system.
Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear ATC
control when the Rear Temperature Lock button is turned off.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 401
The rear ATC is located in the headliner, near the center • Press the Rear Temperature Lock button on the
of the vehicle.
Uconnect® touchscreen. This turns off the Rear Temperature Lock icon in the rear temperature knob.
• Rotate the Rear Blower, Rear Temperature and the
Rear Mode Control knobs to suit your comfort needs.
• ATC is selected by adjusting the rear blower knob
counterclockwise to AUTO.
Rear ATC Control Features
1 – Blower Speed
2 – Rear Temperature
3 – Rear MODE
4 – Rear Temperature Lock
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the ATC
System will automatically achieve and maintain that
comfort level. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
system to function automatically.
NOTE: It is not necessary to move the temperature
settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode and fan speed to
provide comfort as quickly as possible.
4
402 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Rear Blower Control
Rear Temperature Control
The rear blower control knob can be manually set to off,
or any fixed blower speed, by rotating the knob from low
to high. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle,
rotate the temperature knob counterclockwise to lower
the temperature, and clockwise to increase the temperature. The rear temperature settings are displayed in the
Uconnect® system.
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature
Control System through an intake grille, located in
the right side trim panel behind the third row seats.
The rear outlets are located in the right side trim
panel of the 3rd Row seat. Do not block or place
objects directly in front of the inlet grille or heater
outlets. The electrical system could overload causing
damage to the blower motor.
When rear controls are locked by the Uconnect® system,
the Rear Temperature Lock symbol on the temperature
knob is illuminated and any rear overhead adjustments
are ignored.
Rear Mode Control
Auto Mode
• The rear system automatically maintains the correct
mode and comfort level desired by the rear seat
occupants.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 403
Headliner Mode
Operating Tips
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
of these outlets can be individually adjusted to suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets
Summer Operation
to one side will shut off the airflow.
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
Bi-Level Mode
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corroAir comes from both the headliner outlets and the sion protection and to protect against engine overheating.
A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology)
floor outlets.
coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the BI-LEVEL
Standard MS-12106 and 50% water is recommended.
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headRefer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Floor Mode
Winter Operation
Air comes from the floor outlets.
Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months
is not recommended because it may cause window
fogging.
4
404 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automatically adjust the climate control settings to reduce or
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service (i.e.,
eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.
vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning
When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high
blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication Outside Air Intake
to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
system is started again.
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
Window Fogging
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The Defrost/Floor winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and slush, and snow.
provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes
A/C Air Filter
a problem, increase the blower speed. Vehicle windows tend
The climate control system filters outside air containing
to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather.
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be
NOTE:
totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
• Recirculation mode without A/C should not be used “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instrucfor long periods, as fogging may occur.
tions.
Vacation Storage
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 405
Manual Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .419
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
▫ Four-Speed or Six-Speed Automatic
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
▫ Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F
Or −29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415 䡵 AUTOSTICK® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417 䡵 ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED . .430
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .417 䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . .430
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .418
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
5
408 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . .443
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .444
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . .447
▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
䡵 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .439
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .440
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .440
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .443
▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .454
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .456
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .457
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .461
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
STARTING AND OPERATING 409
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464 䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .472
▫ All Season Tires — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . .465 䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .473
▫ Summer Or Three Season Tires — If
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
▫ Premium System – If Equipped. . . . . . . . . .
▫ Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
And Wheel — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped . . . . . . . .467
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Full Size Spare — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .467
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .468
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . .
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
. .474
. .477
. .480
. .484
. .484
. .485
. .485
. .486
. .487
. .487
5
410 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488 䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
䡵 FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .495
▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel
Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . .492
▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . .496
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . .496
▫ Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
STARTING AND OPERATING 411
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .512
5
412 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING! (Continued)
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the ⴖOFFⴖ mode, remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in
(Continued)
a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift
lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ ACC or RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 413
Automatic Transmission
CAUTION! (Continued)
The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
(Continued)
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push
of a button, as long as the Remote
Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Key Fob
is in the passenger compartment.
5
414 STARTING AND OPERATING
Normal Starting
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. Place the shift lever/shift selector in PARK, then press
and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pressing the
2.
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, press the button again.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
If the shift lever/shift selector is not in PARK, the
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two
seconds or three short presses in a row with the
vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine
will shut off. The ignition switch position will remain
in the ACC position until the shift lever/shift selector
is in PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF
position. If the shift lever/shift selector is not in PARK
and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed
once, the EVIC (if equipped) will display a “Vehicle
Not In Park” message and the engine will remain
running. Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK
position, or it could roll.
STARTING AND OPERATING 415
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN • Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to place the ignition to the RUN position (EVIC will
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
display “ON/RUN”),
PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30
minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
OFF position.
return the ignition to the OFF position (EVIC will
display “OFF”).
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions – With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C)
NEUTRAL Position)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
an externally powered electric engine block heater (availignition switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
and START. To change the ignition positions without
starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these
steps:
• Starting with the ignition in the OFF position,
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place
the ignition to the ACC position (EVIC will display
“ACC”),
5
416 STARTING AND OPERATING
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
(Continued)
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel:
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
2. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it.
3. Press and release the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
STARTING AND OPERATING 417
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10 The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release hour to have an adequate effect on the engine.
the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15
The engine block heater cord is bundled under the hood
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
between the headlight assembly and the Totally Integrated Power Module (Fuse Box) on the driver’s side of
After Starting
the vehicle.
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
WARNING!
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
5
418 STARTING AND OPERATING
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle
could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the engine is
idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the
brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those
in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should
never exit a vehicle while the engine is running.
Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK, turn the
engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When the
ignition is in the OFF position, the transmission is
locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 419
WARNING! (Continued)
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever. Do not leave the key fob in or
near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to
children), and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC
or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
before the engine can be turned OFF. This helps the
driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without
placing the transmission in PARK.
This system also locks the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in the OFF position.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
out of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the
ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake
pedal must be pressed.
5
420 STARTING AND OPERATING
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
The transmission gear position display (located in the
shifting between these gears.
instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range.
You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEUout of PARK (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Inter- TRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick® shift positions. Manual
lock System” in this section). To drive, move the shift shifts can be made using the AutoStick® shift control
(refer to “AutoStick®” in this section for further informalever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
tion). Moving the shift lever into the AutoStick® (+/-)
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
position (below the Drive position) activates Autostick®
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
mode, providing manual shift control and displaying the
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
current gear in the instrument cluster.
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Four-Speed or Six-Speed Automatic
Transmission
STARTING AND OPERATING 421
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
Shift Lever
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
5
422 STARTING AND OPERATING
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 423
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When
the ignition is in the OFF position, the transmission is locked in the PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever. Do not leave the key fob in or
near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to
children), and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC
or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
5
424 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift
lever could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posiperiods with the engine running. The engine may be
tion:
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is
fully seated.
STARTING AND OPERATING 425
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick® shift
control (refer to “AutoStick®” in this section for further
information) to select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using a lower gear will improve performance and
extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat buildup.
5
426 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating limits, the powertrain controller will modify the
transmission shift schedule and expand the range of
torque converter clutch engagement. This is done to
prevent transmission damage due to overheating.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque
converter clutch is inhibited until the transmission fluid
is warm (refer to the “Note” under “Torque Converter
Clutch” in this section). During extremely cold temperatures (-16°F [-27°C] or below), operation may briefly be
limited to only second gear (for four-speed transmission)
or third gear (for six-speed transmission). Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has
risen to a suitable level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in second gear (for four-speed transmission) or third gear
(for six-speed transmission) regardless of which forward
gear is selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will
continue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the
vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service
without damaging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
STARTING AND OPERATING 427
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position.
Overdrive Operation
The automatic transmission includes an electronically
controlled Overdrive (top gear). The transmission will
5. Restart the engine.
automatically shift into Overdrive if the following con6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no ditions are present:
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal • The shift lever is in the DRIVE position.
operation.
• The transmission fluid has reached an adequate temNOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recomperature.
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has • The engine coolant has reached an adequate temperature.
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
• The vehicle speed is sufficiently high and the driver is
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
not heavily pressing the accelerator.
5
428 STARTING AND OPERATING
Torque Converter Clutch
AUTOSTICK®
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
different feeling or response during normal operation in
the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during
some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
AutoStick® is a driver-interactive transmission feature
providing manual shift control, giving you more control
of the vehicle. AutoStick® allows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance. This
system can also provide you with more control during
passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain
driving, trailer towing, and many other situations.
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage until
the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm
(usually after 1 to 3 miles [2 to 5 km] of driving). Because
the engine speed is higher when the torque converter
clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission
is not shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is normal.
Using the AutoStick® shift control, when the transmission is sufficiently warm, will demonstrate that the
transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive.
Operation
When the shift lever is in the AutoStick® position (below
the DRIVE position), it can be moved from side to side.
This allows the driver to manually select the transmission
gear being used. Moving the shift lever to the left (-)
triggers a downshift and to the right (+) an upshift. The
current gear will be displayed in the instrument cluster.
STARTING AND OPERATING 429
In AutoStick® mode, the transmission will shift up or • You can start out, from a stop, in any gear except top
down when the driver moves the shift lever to the right
gear. Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in
second gear. Starting out in second gear is helpful in
(+) or left (-), unless an engine lugging or overspeed
snow or icy conditions.
condition would result. It will remain in the selected gear
until another upshift or downshift is chosen, except as
• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
described below.
over-speed, that shift will not occur.
• The transmission will automatically upshift when nec• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick® is enessary to prevent engine over-speed.
gaged.
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
AutoStick® is engaged.
display the current gear.
• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first
fault or overheat condition is detected.
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the To disengage AutoStick® mode, return the shift lever to
the DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the
vehicle is accelerated.
AutoStick® position at any time without taking your foot
off the accelerator pedal.
5
430 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED
This feature provides on-demand All-Wheel Drive
(AWD). The system is automatic with no driver inputs or
additional driving skills required. Under normal driving
conditions, the front wheels provide most of the traction.
If the front wheels begin to lose traction, power is shifted
automatically to the rear wheels. The greater the front
wheel traction loss, the greater the power transfer to the
rear wheels.
Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle
input (where one may have no wheel spin), torque will be
sent to the rear in a pre-emptive effort to improve vehicle
launch and performance characteristics.
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire
size may cause failure of the power transfer unit.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the front (driving) wheels.
STARTING AND OPERATING 431
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a Driving through water more than a few inches/
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
5
432 STARTING AND OPERATING
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions
and Warnings before doing so.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 433
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
5
434 STARTING AND OPERATING
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
does not in any way damage the steering system.
WARNING!
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
NOTE:
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
CAUTION!
STARTING AND OPERATING 435
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for the correct fluid
type.
5
436 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave the
transmission in PARK.
The foot operated parking brake is located below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To
release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a
second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake
disengage.
Parking Brake
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument
cluster will illuminate.
STARTING AND OPERATING 437
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied.
It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped
with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake
before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load
on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied whenever the driver is
not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving unattended
children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift
lever. Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and
do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/
RUN mode. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
5
438 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. However, there will
be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be
evident by increased pedal travel during application and
greater pedal force required to slow or stop the vehicle. In
addition, if the malfunction is caused by a leak in the
hydraulic system, the “Brake Warning Light” will turn on
as the brake fluid level drops in the master cylinder.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine OFF) the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
STARTING AND OPERATING 439
WARNING!
• Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive lining
wear, and possible brake damage. You would not
have your full braking capacity in an emergency.
• Driving a vehicle with the “Brake Warning Light”
on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking
performance or vehicle stability during braking
may occur. It will take you longer to stop the
vehicle or will make your vehicle harder to control.
You could have a collision. Have the vehicle
checked immediately.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock-up to help
avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking. Refer to
“Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)” under “Electronic Brake
Control System” in this section for more information.
WARNING!
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ABS
cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting
from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of an
ABS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
5
440 STARTING AND OPERATING
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system commonly referred to as ESC. This
system includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake
Assist System (BAS), Traction Control System (TCS),
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM), Electronic Stability
Control (ESC), Trailer Sway Control (TSC) and Hill Start
Assist (HSA). These systems work together to enhance
both vehicle stability and control in various driving
conditions.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
related motor noises. These noises are the system performing its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS is
working properly. This self check occurs each time the
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can include ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.
You also may experience the following when the brake
system goes into Anti-lock:
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most • The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop),
braking conditions. The system automatically “pumps”
the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent • The clicking sound of solenoid valves,
wheel lock-up.
• Brake pedal pulsations, and
STARTING AND OPERATING 441
• A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference
caused by improperly installed or high output
radio transmitting equipment. This interference
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to an accident.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
5
442 STARTING AND OPERATING
If both the Brake System Warning Light and the ABS
Light remain on, the ABS and Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD) systems are not functioning. ImmediThe Anti-Lock Brake Light monitors the ABS.
The light will turn on when the ignition switch ate repair to the ABS system is required.
is turned to the ON position and may stay on Brake Assist System (BAS)
for as long as four seconds.
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
If the ABS Light remains on or comes on while driving, it capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system system detects an emergency braking situation by sensis not functioning and that service is required. However, ing the rate and amount of brake application and then
the conventional brake system will continue to operate applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
normally if the Brake System Warning Light is not on.
ABS. Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best
If the ABS Light is on, the brake system should be
BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the system, you
serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of
must apply continuous braking pressure during the
Anti-Lock brakes. If the ABS Light does not come on
stopping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes). Do not
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position,
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer
have the light repaired as soon as possible.
desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
Anti-Lock Brake Light
STARTING AND OPERATING 443
WARNING!
BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction
afforded by prevailing road conditions. BAS cannot
prevent accidents, including those resulting from
excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BASequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS functions similar to a
limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in
the “Partial Off” mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)” in this section for more information.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or
evasive driving maneuvers.
5
444 STARTING AND OPERATING
ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring
during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It cannot
prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as road
conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or
other vehicles.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions, and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERMequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for over-steering and under-steering the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel. Engine
power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain
the desired path.
The ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path
that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares
it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path
does not match the intended path, the ESC applies the
brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting
the condition of over-steer or under-steer.
• Over-steer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Under-steer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
STARTING AND OPERATING 445
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting
from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive,
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
ESC Operating Modes
The ESC system has two available operating modes.
Full On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever the
vehicle is started the system will be in this mode. This
mode should be used for most driving situations. ESC
should only be turned to “Partial Off” for specific reasons
as noted. Refer to “Partial Off” for additional information.
Partial Off
The “ESC OFF” button is located in the switch bank
above the climate control. To enter the “Partial Off”
mode, momentarily press the “ESC OFF” button and the
“ESC OFF” Indicator Light will illuminate. To turn the
ESC on again, momentarily press the “ESC OFF” button
and the “ESC OFF” Indicator Light will turn off. This will
restore the normal “ESC On” mode of operation.
5
446 STARTING AND OPERATING
mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily
pressing the “ESC OFF” button. This may be done while
the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING!
ESC OFF Button
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow,
sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the
“Partial Off” mode by momentarily pressing the “ESC
OFF” button. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off”
• When in “Partial Off ” mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC (except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section) has been disabled and
the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated.
When in “Partial Off ”mode, the engine power
reduction of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced
vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is
reduced.
• Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the
ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
STARTING AND OPERATING 447
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should go out with the engine NOTE:
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momenmalfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at • Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authowill be ON even if it was turned off previously.
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
diagnosed and corrected.
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lowhen ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
that caused the ESC activation.
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
5
448 STARTING AND OPERATING
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially
off.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer. TSC activates automatically once
the excessively swaying trailer is recognized. When TSC
is functioning, the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power will be reduced,
and you will feel the brake being applied to individual
wheels in an attempt to stop the trailer from swaying.
NOTE: The TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in
the “Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
• TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always
use caution when towing a trailer and follow the
tongue weight recommendations. Refer to ”Vehicle
Loading” and “Trailer Towing” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information.
• If TSC activates while towing a trailer, stop the
vehicle at the nearest safe location and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate the trailer sway.
• Failure to follow these warnings can result in an
accident or serious personal injury.
STARTING AND OPERATING 449
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backThe HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
ing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the the activation criteria have been met. The system will not
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK.
during this short period of time, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
WARNING!
system will release brake pressure in proportion to the
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded
vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the system
the intended direction of travel.
will not activate and slight rolling may occur. This
HSA Activation Criteria
could cause a collision with another vehicle or object.
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
activate:
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
• Vehicle must be stopped.
• Vehicle must be on a 6% (approximate) grade or
greater hill.
5
450 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing With HSA
WARNING! (Continued)
HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade
when pulling a trailer.
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, your trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, when the
brake pedal is released there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a
hill and this could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object behind you. In order to avoid
rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration,
manually activate the trailer brake prior to releasing the brake pedal. Always remember the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.
(Continued)
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
• Failure to follow these warnings may cause the
vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide
with another vehicle, object or person, and cause
serious or fatal injury. Always remember to use the
parking brake while parking on a hill and that the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
NOTE: The HSA system may also be turned on and off if
the vehicle is equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 451
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
5
452 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure comstandards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T or S = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
STARTING AND OPERATING 453
EXAMPLE:
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
— ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
5
454 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load (LL) = Light load tire
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load— Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure— Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
STARTING AND OPERATING 455
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
— 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
— 01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
5
456 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
STARTING AND OPERATING 457
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
5
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
B-Pillar Location For Tire And Loading Information Placard
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
458 STARTING AND OPERATING
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
spare tires.
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
Loading
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the weight referenced here.
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occuinflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
of this manual.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pasGAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 459
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE:
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The followbe five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
650 lbs [295 kg]).
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
• For the following example, the combined weight of
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
capacity calculated in step 4.
(392 kg).
5
460 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING AND OPERATING 461
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
5
462 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride. Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear paterratic and unpredictable steering response.
terns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear
patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier • Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
STARTING AND OPERATING 463
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
At least once a month:
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
may look properly inflated even when they are under- of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
inflated.
Tire Inflation Pressures
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the
winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
5
464 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle Radial Ply Tires
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original
WARNING!
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operatCombining radial ply tires with other types of tires
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
STARTING AND OPERATING 465
Tire Repair
All Season Tires — If Equipped
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring,
summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary bemeets the following criteria:
tween different all season tires. All season tires can be
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
handling of your vehicle.
• The puncture is no greater than ¼⬙ (6 mm).
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
additional information.
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immeaware these tires are not designed for winter or cold
diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
driving conditions. For more information, contact a auservice description (Load Index and Speed Code).
thorized dealer. Summer tires do not contain the all
season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on
the tire sidewall.
5
466 STARTING AND OPERATING
Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states proSnow Tires
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires checked before using these tire types.
during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.
Wheel — If Equipped
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
safety and handling of your vehicle.
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph tire rotation pattern.
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
STARTING AND OPERATING 467
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You
can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare
by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spare
tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S” preceding
the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled Full Size Spare — If Equipped
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
5
468 STARTING AND OPERATING
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
STARTING AND OPERATING 469
Tire Spinning
Tread Wear Indicators
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or to help you in determining when your tires should be
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop- replaced.
ping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
5
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
470 STARTING AND OPERATING
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer
to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further information.
Life Of Tire
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
factors including, but not limited to:
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
• Driving style
Replacement Tires
• Tire pressure
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
• Distance driven
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manuhigher, and summer tires typically have a reduced facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivatread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main- lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
tenance schedule is highly recommended.
STARTING AND OPERATING 471
“Tread Wear Indicators”. Refer to the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this
manual for more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
(Continued)
5
472 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may
result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
• Install on Front Tires Only.
• Due to limited clearance, P225/65R17 tire with a
Security Chain Company (SCC) Super Z6 low profile
traction device or equivalent is recommended.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 473
CAUTION! (Continued)
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
the damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pavement.
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
5
474 STARTING AND OPERATING
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
Tire Rotation
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the
outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour
period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and
Operating” for information on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the
vehicle is driven. This is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
STARTING AND OPERATING 475
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates,
you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended
cold placard pressure in order for the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” to turn off. The system will
automatically update and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will turn off once the system receives the
updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire
pressure is low enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause
the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa),
but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will still
be on. In this situation, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will turn off only after the tires are inflated
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value.
5
476 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to your local dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.
(Continued)
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
STARTING AND OPERATING 477
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Base System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte- readings to the receiver module.
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level and to maintain the proper pressure.
to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure MonitorThe TPMS consists of the following components:
ing Telltale Light.”
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, • Receiver Module
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in • Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
the tire.
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
5
478 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, a “LOW
TIRE” message will be displayed and a chime will sound
when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active
road tires. An ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will also be
displayed. Should this occur, you should stop as soon as
possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire on your
vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value, as shown in the
⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the system receives the
updated tire pressures, the system will automatically
update and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
and “LOW TIRE” message will turn off. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
Service TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will
also sound a chime. If the ignition switch is cycled, this
sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still
exists. The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A
system fault can occur due to any of the following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the
TPMS sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
STARTING AND OPERATING 479
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid.
NOTE:
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure 5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monithe TPMS will update automatically and the “Tire
tor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off, as
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warnwarning limit in any of the four active road tires. The
ing limit, a chime will sound and the “Tire Pressure
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn on and a “LOW
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
TIRE” message will be displayed for a minimum of
receive this information.
five seconds upon the next ignition switch cycle. An
⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will also be displayed.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid.
5
480 STARTING AND OPERATING
Premium System – If Equipped
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the
four active road tires. In addition, the Electronic Vehicle
readings to the receiver module.
Information Center (EVIC) will display a graphic showNOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
ing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
pressure values in a different color. An ⬙Inflate to XX⬙
and to maintain the proper pressure.
message will also be displayed.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
STARTING AND OPERATING 481
message. Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update, the graphic
display in the EVIC will change color back to the original
color, and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
Service TPMS Warning
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and
inflate the tires with low pressure (those in a different color
in the EVIC graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value, as shown in the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will
also sound a chime. In addition, the EVIC will display a
⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being
received.
5
482 STARTING AND OPERATING
Light” will no longer flash, and the ⬙SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM⬙ message will no longer display, and a pressure
value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault
can occur due to any of the following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, 4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
STARTING AND OPERATING 483
The EVIC will also display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
and a chime will sound. In addition, the graphic in the
message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
EVIC will still display a pressure value in a different
fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is
color. An ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will also be disdetected. In this case, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
played.
message is then followed with a graphic display with
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
pressure values still shown. This indicates that the pres15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors
Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
but they may not be located in the correct vehicle
then remain on solid. In addition, the EVIC will
position. The system still needs to be serviced as long as
display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a
the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message is displayed.
minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -)
in place of the pressure value.
NOTE:
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure 4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not moniwill flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
tor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
solid, and the EVIC will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warnthen display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
ing limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will remain on
5
484 STARTING AND OPERATING
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare, following licenses:
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
MRXC4W4MA4
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off United States
and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure Canada
2546A-C4W4MA4
value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure
is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the FUEL REQUIREMENTS
four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven
for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order
This engine is designed to meet all emisfor the TPMS to receive this information.
sions regulations and provide excellent
fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded “regular” gasoThis device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
line having an octane rating of 87. The use
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not
following conditions:
provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
engines.
General Information
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
STARTING AND OPERATING 485
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasolines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates
may be used in your vehicle.
5
486 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and drivability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher
ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
• Poor engine performance.
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may • Poor cold start and cold drivability.
not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
STARTING AND OPERATING 487
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
E-85 perform the following:
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
• Drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer).
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
• Change the engine oil and oil filter.
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
• Disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
engine controller memory.
and California reformulated gasoline.
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
Materials Added To Fuel
exposure to E-85 fuel.
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
MMT In Gasoline
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl) detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is conditions and they would result in additional cost.
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage fuel.
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
5
488 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
(Continued)
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
STARTING AND OPERATING 489
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique
fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those
5
490 STARTING AND OPERATING
subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to
the other sections of this manual for information on
features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
gasoline-only powered vehicles.
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can
operate on E-85.
E-85 Fuel Cap
E-85 Badge
STARTING AND OPERATING 491
For best results, a refueling pattern that avoids alternating between E-85 and unleaded gasoline is recomE-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and
mended.
15% unleaded gasoline.
When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that:
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the
tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never
use it near an open flame.
Fuel Requirements
• You do not add less than 5 gallons (19 Liters) when
refueling.
• You drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at
least 5 miles (8 km).
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
starting and/or significant deterioration in driveability
during warm up.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on
• Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87, or E-85
non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, you may experience
fuel, or any mixture of these two fuels.
hard starting and rough idle following start up even if
the above recommendations are followed, especially
when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
5
492 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline
additive, such as MOPAR® Injector Cleanup or
Techron may be used.
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formulated engine oils. These special requirements are included
in MOPAR® engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395
contains additional requirements, developed during extensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to
Chrysler Group LLC engines. Use MOPAR® or an
equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.
Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an
increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
until the engine is fully warmed up.
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) is
beneficial for E-85 startability when the ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel
consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon
(mpg)/miles per liter and your driving range to decrease
by about 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
STARTING AND OPERATING 493
Replacement Parts
ADDING FUEL
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol compatible parts.
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
CAUTION!
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the left
side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure
the replacement cap has been designed for use with this
vehicle.
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
5
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect drivability.
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
494 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door reinforcement.
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap).
• A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into
the fuel system.
• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
• Failure to follow this warning may result in serious
injury or death.
NOTE:
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
STARTING AND OPERATING 495
• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened
properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn
on if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure
that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is
refueled.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, the
word “gASCAP” will display in the odometer. If this
occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap until a “clicking” sound
is heard and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn
off the message. If the problem persists, the message will
appear the next time the vehicle is started.
VEHICLE LOADING
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on
the “Vehicle Certification Label.” This information
should be used for passenger and luggage loading as
indicated.
Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to
the drivers side B-Pillar or the rear of the driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
• Name of manufacturer
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap • Month and year of manufacture
may also turn on the MIL. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic • Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
System” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further infor• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
mation.
5
496 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
• Type of Vehicle
• Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
STARTING AND OPERATING 497
Overloading
Loading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the
front and rear GAWR.
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
it is not over the GVWR.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
TRAILER TOWING
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
5
498 STARTING AND OPERATING
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage, Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
follow the requirements and recommendations in this The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
Common Towing Definitions
ready for operation⬙ condition. The recommended way to
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a
you in understanding the following information:
vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
supported by the scale.
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
and trailer when weighed in combination.
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 499
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Frontal Area
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear
GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less
than 10% of the trailer load. You must consider this as
part of the load on your vehicle.
Trailer Sway Control – Electronic
Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System/Trailer Sway
Control (TSC)” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
Trailer Sway Control – Mechanical
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
5
500 STARTING AND OPERATING
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction / hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration / loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements. Weight Distribution hitched are recommended for loads in excess of
5,000 lbs (2,268 kg).
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 501
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Duty
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed
on your vehicle.
5
502 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer
weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain:
Engine/
Transmission
2.4L/
Automatic
GCWR (Gross Combined Wt. Rating)
Frontal Area
6,000 lbs (2 722 kg)
22 sq ft (2.0 sq m)
Max. GTW (Gross
Trailer Wt.)
1,000 lbs (454 kg)
which includes up to
5 persons & Luggage
Max. Tongue Wt.
100 lbs (45 kg)
STARTING AND OPERATING 503
Engine/
Transmission
3.6L/
Automatic
GCWR (Gross Combined Wt. Rating)
Frontal Area
7,300 lbs (3 311 kg)
32 sq ft (3.0 sq m)
7,300 lbs (3 311 kg)
32 sq ft (3.0 sq m)
7,300 lbs (3 311 kg)
32 sq ft (3.0 sq m)
Max. GTW (Gross
Trailer Wt.)
2,500 lbs (1 134 kg)
which includes 1 to 2
persons & Luggage
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
which includes 3 to 4
persons & Luggage
1,500 lbs (680 kg)
which includes 5 to 7
persons & Luggage
Max. Tongue Wt.
200 lbs (91 kg)
150 lbs (68 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
* Except for AWD
models
5
504 STARTING AND OPERATING
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
• The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part
many trailer collisions.
of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire Safety your bumper or trailer hitch.
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
NOTE:
• * For All Wheel Drive (AWD) models carrying 5 to 7
persons and luggage will exceed the rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) and therefore should not be
attempted.
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
STARTING AND OPERATING 505
Consider the following items when computing the Towing Requirements
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive• The tongue weight of the trailer.
train components the following guidelines are recom• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment mended:
put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or authorized dealer-installed
options must be considered as part of the total load on
your vehicle. Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information”
placard for the maximum combined weight of occupants
and cargo for your vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
5
506 STARTING AND OPERATING
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance
Schedule.” Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further
information. When towing a trailer, never exceed the
GAWR, or GCWR, ratings.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and that it will not shift during travel. When
trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic
load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the
driver to control. You could lose control of your
vehicle and have a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance, or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure, or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow
enough slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic
transmission in PARK. Always, block or ⴖchockⴖ
the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 507
WARNING! (Continued)
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
Towing Requirements – Tires
– Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures
before trailer usage.
– Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for the
proper inspection procedure.
– When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for information
on replacement tires and for the proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load
carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR
and GAWR limits.
– Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
spare tire.
– Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe • Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operpersonal injury.
ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
5
508 STARTING AND OPERATING
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a
collision.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a
collision.
STARTING AND OPERATING 509
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and sevenpin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
5
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
Four-Pin Connector
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
510 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,
and backing up the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. However, if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, use
the Autostick® shift control to select a lower gear.
Seven-Pin Connector
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45
minutes of continuous operation, then change the transmission fluid and filter as specified for “police, taxi, fleet,
STARTING AND OPERATING 511
or frequent trailer towing.” Refer to the “Maintenance AutoStick®
Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
– When using the AutoStick® shift control, select the
highest gear that allows for adequate performance and
NOTE: Check the transmission fluid level (four-speed
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “4” if
transmission only) before towing. The six-speed transthe desired speed can be maintained. Choose “3” or
mission does not require a fluid level check before
“2” if needed to maintain the desired speed.
towing. If, however, you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, see your authorized dealer immedi- – To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
ately for assistance.
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as necessary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
conditions allow.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
5
512 STARTING AND OPERATING
Highway Driving
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over- Reduce speed.
heating, take the following actions:
Air Conditioning
City Driving
Turn off temporarily.
When stopped for short periods, shift the transmission
into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Dolly Tow
On Trailer
Wheel OFF the Ground
NONE
Front
Rear
ALL
FWD Models
NOT ALLOWED
OK
NOT ALLOWED
OK
AWD Models
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
STARTING AND OPERATING 513
Recreational Towing – Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Mod- 4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following
els – Automatic Transmission
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front wheels 5. Release the parking brake.
are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a
tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow
CAUTION!
this procedure:
• DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
drivetrain will result.
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
Damage from improper towing is not covered un3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place the transmisder the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
sion in PARK.
5
514 STARTING AND OPERATING
Recreational Towing – All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Models
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground,
or using a towing dolly) is NOT ALLOWED. The only
acceptable method for towing this vehicle (behind another vehicle) is on a vehicle trailer with all four wheels
OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on the
ground can cause severe transmission and/or power
transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing
is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .517
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .517
▫ Spare Tire Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
▫ 2.4L Engine — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . .520
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
▫ Spare Tire Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
䡵 JUMP-STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
6
516 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
䡵 SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
▫ All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Models . . . . . . . . . . .543
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .541
▫ Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models . . . . . . . . . .544
▫ Without The Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 517
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
instrument panel switch bank, above the climate controls. potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning • On the highways — slow down.
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc- • In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
an impending overheat condition:
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
to High. This allows the heater core to act as a
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
from the engine cooling system.
may wear down your battery.
6
518 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the A/C turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H,” and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine OFF immediately, and call for service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
2.4L Engine — If Equipped
On hot days the engine oil temperature may become too
hot during sustained high-speed driving or if towing a
trailer up long grades. If this happens, a HOTOIL message will flash in the odometer and the vehicle speed will
be reduced to 48 mph (77 km/h) maximum until the
engine oil temperature is reduced.
NOTE: The maximum vehicle speed is reduced to
48 mph (77 km/h), you may reduce vehicle speed further
as needed. Once the engine oil temperature is reduced,
you may continue to drive normally.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 519
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
100 Ft-Lbs (135 N·m)
M12 x 1.25
Lug Nut/
Bolt
Socket
Size
19 mm
**Use only Chrysler recommended lug nuts/bolts and
clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
6
Wheel Mounting Surface
520 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
Torque Patterns
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 521
WARNING! (Continued)
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location
The jack and jack-handle are stowed underneath a cover
in the rear storage bin in the cargo area.
6
Jack Storage Location
Spare Tire Location
The spare tire is stowed underneath the rear of the
vehicle and is held in place by means of a cable winch
mechanism.
522 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from the
example, if changing the right front
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
tire, block the left rear wheel.
areas.
Preparations For Jacking
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the shift lever in PARK .
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Spare Tire Removal
NOTE: On seven-passenger models, fold the third-row
passenger seats flat. This will provide more space when
accessing the jacking tools and when operating the winch
mechanism.
1. Remove the jack-handle components 1, 2 and 3 from
storage and assemble them.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 523
NOTE: Assemble components 2 and 3 by seating the
small ball at the end of component 2 in the small hole at
the end of component 3. This will lock these components
together. Assemble components 1 and 2 so that the wheel
nut socket at the end of component 1 faces upward when
seated on component 2. This will make it easier to rotate
the assembly when operating the winch mechanism.
Lowering/Raising Spare Tire
1 — Spare Tire Jack Handle
2 — Extension 1
3 — Extension 2
2. Fit the assembled jack-handle over the winch drive
nut located in the jack storage area. Rotate the jackhandle assembly counterclockwise until the spare tire
is on the ground with enough cable slack to allow you
to pull the spare tire out from underneath the vehicle.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack-handle only. Use of an air wrench or other power
tools is not recommended and it can damage the winch.
6
524 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Pull the spare tire out from underneath the vehicle and Spare Tire Stowage
raise it upright so the tire’s tread is on the ground.
NOTE: Refer to “Spare Tire Removal” for information on
4. Tilt the retainer at the end of the winch cable and assembling the winch tools.
remove it from the center of the wheel.
1. Place the spare tire near to the winch cable. Hold the
spare upright so that the tire’s tread is on the ground
and the valve stem is at the top of the wheel facing
away from the rear of the vehicle.
2. Tilt the retainer at the end of the winch cable and drop
it through the center of the wheel. Then place the spare
tire with the cable and retainer underneath the vehicle.
Spare Tire Retainer
3. Fit the assembled jack-handle over the winch drive
nut. Rotate the jack-handle assembly clockwise to
raise the spare tire into the storage area. Continue to
rotate the jack-handle assembly until you hear the
winch mechanism click three times. It cannot be over
tightened. Push against the tire several times to be
sure it is held securely in place.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 525
Jacking Instructions
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.”
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
6
526 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jack Warning Label
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
Jacking Locations
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and jack-handle from
stowage.
2. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel nuts on the
wheel with the flat tire. Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 527
3. Place the jack in the notches underneath the lift area
that is closest to the flat tire. Center the jack saddle
between the drain flute formations on the sill flange.
Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly engage the jack
saddle with the lift area of the sill flange.
6
Front Jack Engaged With Jack Handle
Front Jacking Location
528 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Rear Jacking Location
Rear Jack Engaged With Jack Handle
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise
with the jack handle. Raise the vehicle until the tire
just clears the road surface and enough clearance is
obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift
provides maximum stability.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 529
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
5. Remove the wheel nuts. For vehicles so equipped,
remove the wheel cover from the wheel by hand. Do
not pry the wheel cover off. Then pull the wheel off the
hub.
6
WARNING!
To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel
covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp
edges.
6. Install the spare tire.
Mounting Spare Tire
530 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counterclockwise with the jack handle.
• For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
9. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
• Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
Spare” under “Tires — General Information” in
each nut has been tightened twice. For the correct lug
“Starting and Operating” for additional warnings,
nut torque refer to Torque Specifications in this seccautions, and information about the spare tire, its
tion. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them
use, and operation.
checked with a torque wrench by your authorized
7. Install the wheel nuts with the cone-shaped end of the
dealer or service station.
nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel nuts.
10. Lower the jack to its fully closed position.
NOTE:
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
11. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area. Do not
stow the deflated tire in the spare tire stowage
location. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or
replaced as soon as possible.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 531
12. To stow the winch cable and retainer, fit the assembled Road Tire Installation
jack-handle over the winch drive nut. Rotate the jackVehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
handle assembly clockwise until you hear the winch
mechanism click three times. It cannot be over tight- 1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
ened.
2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with
13. Stow the jack-handle and jack. Remove the wheel
wheel covers, install two lug nuts on the mounting studs
blocks from the vehicle and release the park brake.
which are on each side of the valve stem. Install the lug
nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the
14. Check the tire pressure as soon as possible. Adjust the
wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
tire pressure as required.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
6
532 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the
valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand,
snapping the cover over the two lug nuts. Do not use
a hammer or excessive force to install the cover.
4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
lug nuts.
WARNING!
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
1 — Valve Stem
2 — Valve Notch
3 — Wheel Lug Nut
4 — Wheel Cover
5 — Mounting Stud
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 533
6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
WARNING!
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
each nut has been tightened twice. For the correct lug do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
nut torque refer to Torque Specifications in this sec- been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
tion. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them result in personal injury.
checked with a torque wrench by your authorized
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
dealer or service station.
handle counterclockwise.
7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly 4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
seated against the wheel.
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
Vehicles Without Wheel Covers
each nut has been tightened twice. For proper lug nut
torque refer to Torque Specifications in this secton. If
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
in doubt about the correct tightness, have them
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
checked with a torque wrench by your authorized
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
dealer or service station.
lug nuts.
6
534 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
JUMP-STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and Preparations For Jump-Start
precautions.
The battery in your vehicle is located between the left
front headlight assembly and the left front wheel splash
shield. To allow jump-starting, there are remote battery
posts located on the left side of the engine compartment.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 535
WARNING!
Remote Battery Posts
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post (Covered With Protective Cap)
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
6
536 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Remove the protective cover over the remote positive Jump-Starting Procedure
(+) battery post. To remove the cover, press the locking
tab and pull upward on the cover.
WARNING!
4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Failure to follow this procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 537
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper 1. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the discable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
charged battery.
the discharged battery.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and
could result in personal injury. Only use the specific
ground point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
2. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote positive
(+) battery post of the discharged vehicle.
6
538 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle, front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
you should have the battery and charging system in- and REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator
pedal. Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure
spected at your authorized dealer.
that will maintain the rocking motion, without spinning
the wheels or racing the engine.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 539
NOTE: Press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in
⬙Partial Off⬙ mode, before rocking the vehicle.
Refer to “Electronic Brake Control” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information. Once the vehicle
has been freed, press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again to restore
⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
6
540 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Open the center console and remove the shift lever 4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
override access cover (located in the front lower right
5. Insert a screwdriver or similar small tool into the
corner of the console storage bin).
access port, and push and hold the override release
lever forward.
6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover.
Shift Lever Override Access Cover
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 541
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial wrecker service.
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Flatbed
Wheel OFF the Ground
NONE
Rear
Front
ALL
FWD MODELS
IF transmission is
operable:
• Transmission in
NEUTRAL
• 25 mph (40 km/h)
max speed
• 15 miles (24 km)
max distance
NOT ALLOWED
OK
BEST METHOD
AWD MODELS
NOT ALLOWED
6
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
542 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.
If the vehicle’s battery is discharged, refer to “Shift Lever
Override” in this section for instructions on shifting the
transmission out of PARK for towing.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Damage to the fascia will occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
• Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and transmission may result.
• If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the
ignition switch must be in the ACC or ON/RUN
position, not in the LOCK/OFF position.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 543
Without The Key Fob
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Models
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the OFF position. Flatbed towing is
the preferred towing method. However, if a flatbed
towing vehicle is not available, wheel lift towing equipment may be used. Rear towing (with the front wheels on
the ground) is not allowed, as transmission damage will
occur. If rear towing is the only alternative, the front
wheels must be placed on a towing dolly. Proper towing
equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle.
The manufacturer requires towing with all four wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the
vehicle on a flatbed, or with one end of vehicle raised and
the opposite end on a towing dolly.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or power
transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing
is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
6
544 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with be towed faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than
15 miles (24 km), it must be towed with the front
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
wheels OFF the ground (using a flatbed truck, towing
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmis- dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front wheels
sion is operable, the vehicle may be flat towed (with all raised).
four wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
CAUTION!
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
• The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km).
• The towing speed must not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L . . . . . . . . . .547
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . .548
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .549
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .549
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
▫ A/C Air Filter – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .552
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568
7
546 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575 䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
▫ Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) – AWD Models
Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
▫ Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – AWD Models
Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
▫ Front Low/High Beam Headlamp, Turn
Signal/Park Lamp, And Side Marker Lamp . .598
▫ Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599
▫ Rear Turn Signal And Backup Lamp . . . . . . . .600
▫ License Plate Lamp . . . . . .
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . .
orrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND
▫ Cleaning The Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
GENUINE PARTS . . . . . . . .
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Underhood Fuses (Power Distribution Center) . .592
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .607
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 547
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
—
—
—
—
—
—
Engine Coolant Reservoir
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
Engine Oil Fill
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post)
7 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
8 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick (4–Speed Only)
9 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
10 — Coolant Pressure Cap
11 — Engine Oil Dipstick
548 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Engine Coolant Reservoir
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
5
6
7
8
— Air Cleaner Filter
— Washer Fluid Reservoir
— Engine Oil Dipstick
— Engine Oil Fill
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 549
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light” (MIL). It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, the
word “gASCAP” will display in the odometer. If this
occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap until a “clicking” sound
is heard and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn
off the message. If the problem persists, the message will
appear the next time the vehicle is started.
7
550 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test, which
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your
may also turn on the MIL.
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
PROGRAMS
not crank or start the engine.
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system. NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte- 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
of a normal bulb check.
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
system is ready for testing.
happen:
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II • The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacethe ignition or start the engine. This means that your
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
not proceed to the I/M station.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 551
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for mainteauthorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was nance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, Limited Warranty.
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II DEALER SERVICE
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personmay then indicate that the system is now ready.
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
available which include detailed service information for
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
attempting any procedure yourself.
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
7
552 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
penalties being assessed against you.
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 553
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, power steering or air conditioning.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of
component malfunction, use only the specified
fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking engine oil level
when the engine is cold will give you an incorrect
reading.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and
only when the engine is hot, will improve the accuracy of
the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the
range markings on the dipstick. Either the range markings consist of a crosshatch zone marked SAFE or a
crosshatch zone marked with MIN at the low end of the
range and MAX at the high end of the range. Adding
1.0 qt (1.0 l) of oil when the reading is at the low end of
the range marking will raise the oil level to the high end
of the range marking.
7
554 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not overfill the engine. Overfilling the engine
will cause oil aeration, which can lead to loss of oil
pressure and an increase in oil temperature. This
could damage your engine. Also, be sure the oil fill
cap is replaced and tightened after adding oil.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve
months, whichever occurs first.
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 555
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Lubricants that do not have both, the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity — 3.6L Engine
MOPAR® SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to Chrysler
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil®, Shell
MOPAR® SAE 5W-20 engine oil or equivalent Pennzoil® Helix® or equivalent. is recommended for all operating
or Shell Helix® is recommended for all operating tem- temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
peratures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy.
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Comthe engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Com- partment” illustration in this section.
Engine Oil Viscosity – 2.4L Engine
partment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further NOTE: MOPAR® SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to
information.
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil®,
Shell Helix® or equivalent may be used when SAE 5W-20
engine oil meeting MS-6395 is not available.
7
556 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Synthetic Engine Oils
Engine Oil Filter
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom- The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom- at every engine oil change.
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
Engine Oil Filter Selection
are followed.
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
Materials Added To Engine Oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addi- of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are a high quality oil
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. filter and are recommended.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, maintenance intervals.
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where
used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 557
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
NOTE: The battery is stored in a compartment that is
located behind the left front fender and is accessible
through the wheel well. The wheel and tire assemble do
not need to be removed to access the compartment.
Remote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for jump-starting. Refer to “Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further
information.
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters To access the battery, turn the steering wheel fully to the
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be right and remove the access panel from the inner fender
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air shield.
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
7
558 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 559
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
7
560 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
WARNING!
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How- operating or personal injury may result.
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
service be performed by authorized dealer or other the glove box. Perform the following steps to replace the
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment. filter:
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system 1. Open the glove box and remove all contents.
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
2. Push the retaining tab on each side of the glove box
A/C Air Filter – If Equipped
inward while gently pulling the glove box door outward until both tabs clear the door opening in the
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
instrument panel.
maintenance intervals.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 561
Glove Box Removal
3. Pivot the glove box downward.
4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter
cover to the HVAC housing and remove the cover.
A/C Air Filter Replacement
5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing.
7
562 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
6. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the
cover.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
CAUTION!
MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operaThe A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to tion and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should
to install the filter properly will result in the need to be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
replace it more often.
attention should also be given to hood latching compo7. Reinstall the glove box door. Make sure that the hinges nents to ensure proper function. When performing other
are seated fully as you raise the door. Otherwise, the underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
door latch will not align properly.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR®
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 563
Windshield Wiper Blades
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the 1. Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward, this
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulaliftgate glass.
tions of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions 1 — Wiper Arm
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as neces- 2 — Pivot Cap
sary.
7
564 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully upward unless the pivot cap is raised first.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper
blade off of the liftgate glass.
3. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it
forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper
blade holder.
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Wiper Blade
Blade Pivot Pin
Wiper Arm
Wiper Blade Holder
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 565
4. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly press in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
the wiper blade until it snaps into place.
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
5. Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into
containers.
place.
The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal (4 l) of washer
Adding Washer Fluid
fluid when the message “LoWASH” appears in the
The windshield washer and the rear window washer instrument cluster.
share the same fluid reservoir. The fluid reservoir is
located in the engine compartment. Be sure to check the
WARNING!
fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the
reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator Commercially available windshield washer solvents
antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
flush out the residual water.
the washer solution.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some
washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper
blades clean. This will help blade performance.
7
566 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 567
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
7
568 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam- Cooling System
age:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had
time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 569
Coolant Checks
Cooling System — Drain, Flush, And Refill
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed, and refilled with fresh engine coolant (antifreeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to
MS-12106).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubneeded to be added to the system please contact your
ber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection
local authorized dealer.
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
Selection Of Coolant
leaks.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
7
570 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 571
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material StanYour vehicle has been built with an improved engine
dard MS-12106 and distilled water. Use higher concencoolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) that allows
trations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (anti−34° F (−37° C) are anticipated.
freeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this • Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionextended maintenance period, it is important that you use
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
MS-12106) throughout the life of your vehicle.
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to mainthat meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan- tain the proper level of protection against freezing acdard MS-12106. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze): cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
• We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant the vehicle is operated.
Adding Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler
Material Standard MS-12106.
7
572 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the
cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the
cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent
scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 573
3.6L Engine – the level of the coolant in the pressurized
coolant bottle should be between the “COLD” and
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
“FULL” range on the bottle when the engine is cold.
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani- no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based coolant freeze point or replacing engine coolant (antiengine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in freeze). Advise your service attendant of this. As long as
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground coolant bottle need only be checked once a month. When
spills immediately.
additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant
Coolant Level
bottle. Do not overfill.
2.4L Engine – the coolant bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the engine idling and warm to normal
operating temperature, the level of the coolant in the
bottle should be between the “ADD” and “FULL” lines,
shown on the bottle.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
7
574 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
for leaks.
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor- • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
MS-12106) and distilled water for proper corrosion prohumidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaportection of your engine which contains aluminum comized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
ponents.
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
Points To Remember
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no • Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
condenser clean.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze) • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 575
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when performing underhood services.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically. Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid level up
maintenance intervals.
to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear.
Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are
replaced. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. ReMaster Cylinder – Brake Fluid Level Check
fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “MainCheck the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
if the “Brake Warning Light” indicates system failure.
7
576 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely
damage your brake system and/or impair its performance. The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle
is also identified on the original factory installed
hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 577
Automatic Transmission
CAUTION! (Continued)
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used
in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should
be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
(Continued)
shudder, and will require more frequent fluid and
filter changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and
Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid
leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.
7
578 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check – Four-Speed Automatic
Transmission
Use the following procedure to check the transmission
fluid level properly:
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
2. Run the engine at normal idle speed for at least 60
seconds, and leave the engine running for the rest of
this procedure.
3. Fully apply the parking brake, and press the brake
pedal.
4. Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear position (allowing time for the transmission to fully engage in each position), ending with the transmission in
PARK.
5. Wipe the area around the dipstick clean to prevent dirt
from entering the transmission.
6. Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot
or cold. You can also read the transmission fluid
temperature using the Vehicle Information display in
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in
the instrument cluster. Refer to ⬙Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)⬙ in ⬙Understanding Your
Instrument Panel⬙ for further information. Hot fluid is
approximately 180°F (82°C), which is the normal operating temperature after the vehicle is driven at least
15 miles (24 km). Hot fluid cannot be held comfortably
between the fingertips. Cold fluid is at a temperature
of approximately 80°F (27°C).
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 579
7. Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert it until seated.
Then, remove the dipstick and note the fluid level on
both sides. The fluid level reading is only valid if there
is a solid coating of oil on both sides of the dipstick.
Note that the holes in the dipstick will be full of fluid
if the actual level is at or above the hole.
• If the fluid is hot, the fluid level should be in the
crosshatched area marked “HOT” (between the upper two holes in the dipstick).
• If the fluid is cold, the fluid level should be between
the lower two holes in the area marked “COLD.”
If the fluid level is low, add fluid through the dipstick
tube to bring it to the proper level. Do not overfill. After
adding any quantity of oil through the dipstick tube, wait
at least two minutes for the oil to fully drain into the
transmission before rechecking the fluid level.
NOTE: If it is necessary to check the transmission below
the operating temperature, the fluid level should be
between the two COLD (lower) holes on the dipstick
with the fluid at approximately 80°F (27°C). If the fluid
level is correctly established at 80°F (27°C), it should be
between the HOT (upper) reference holes when the
transmission reaches 180°F (82°C). Remember it is best to
check the level at the normal operating temperature.
8. Check for leaks. Release the parking brake.
7
580 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter shudder, and will require more frequent
fluid and filter changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid
specifications.
• Dirt and water in the transmission can cause serious damage. To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission after checking or replenishing
fluid, make sure that the dipstick cap is re-seated
properly.
Fluid Level Check – Six-Speed Automatic
Transmission
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
fluid level checks are not required, therefore the transmission filler tube is capped and no dipstick is provided. Your
authorized dealer can check your transmission fluid level
using a special service dipstick. If you notice fluid leakage or
transmission malfunction, visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission fluid level checked.
Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause
severe transmission damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 581
Fluid And Filter Changes
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper Frequency Of Fluid Change
maintenance intervals.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
In addition, change the fluid and filter if the fluid maintenance intervals.
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transPower Transfer Unit (PTU) – AWD Models Only
mission is disassembled for any reason.
Lubricant Selection
Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) – AWD Models Only
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer
Lubricant Selection
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “MaintainUse only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “MaintainFluid Level Check
ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
Visually inspect the unit at each oil change for leakage. If
Fluid Level Check
leakage is detected, Check the fluid level by removing the
Visually inspect the unit at each oil change for leakage. If fill plug. The fluid level should be maintained between the
leakage is detected, check the fluid level by removing the bottom of the fill hole to 1/8 in (4 mm) below the fill hole.
fill plug. The fluid level should be maintained between the
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
bottom of the fill hole to 1/8 in (4 mm) below the fill hole.
7
582 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
resistance built into your vehicle.
maintenance intervals.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion What Causes Corrosion?
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 583
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
Special Care
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR® • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
a month.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
7
584 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar • To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner.
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives
the owner.
or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, this finish and such damage is not covered by the New
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY MILD SOAP AND
packaged and sealed.
WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider this is all that is required to maintain this finish.
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 585
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure —
Equipped
Interior Care
Instrument Panel Cover
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface,
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not
with a clean, dry towel.
use protectants or other products, which may cause
undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
restore the low glare surface.
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a
Cleaning Interior Trim
mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR® Total Clean or equiva• For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose
lent, then MOPAR® Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
if absolutely necessary. Do not use harsh cleaners or
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
Armor All®. Use MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent to
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of clean vinyl upholstery
protectants on Stain Repel products.
7
586 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cleaning Leather Upholstery
MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recommended for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can
act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and
should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR®
Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do
not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents,
or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to
maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 587
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol- directly on the mirror.
lowed by rinsing.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
Glass Surfaces
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis 1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear winrag.
dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may
scratch the elements.
7
588 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR® Total Clean, a
mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove
the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft
cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
Cleaning The Cupholders
Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent.
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure
to use proper fuses may result in serious personal
injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 589
WARNING! (Continued)
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
MiniFuse
F102
20 Amp
Yellow
F103
20 Amp
Yellow
F105
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is located on the passenger side
under the instrument panel.
Cavity
F100
F101
Cartridge
Fuse
30 Amp
Pink
MiniFuse
10 Amp
Red
Description
110V AC Inverter –
If Equipped
Interior Lights
F106
F107
Description
Cigar Lighter in
Instrument Panel/
Left Rear Power
Outlet
Power Outlet in
Console Bin/Power
Outlet in Rear of
Console
Heated Seats – If
Equipped
Rear Power Outlet
Rear Camera – If
Equipped
7
590 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
F108
15 Amp
Blue
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
F109
F110
F112
F114
F115
F116
MiniFuse
30 Amp
Pink
Description
Cavity
Instrument Panel
F117
Climate Control/
HVAC
Occupant Restraint
Controller
Spare
F118
F119
F120
Rear HVAC
Blower/Motor
Rear Wiper Motor
F121
Rear Defroster
(EBL)
F123
F122
Cartridge
Fuse
MiniFuse
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Blue
25 Amp
Natural
25 Amp
Natural
Description
Heated Mirrors
Occupant Restraint
Controller
Steering Column
Control Module
All Wheel Drive –
If Equipped
Wireless Ignition
Node
Driver Door
Module
Passenger Door
Module
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 591
Cavity
F124
F125
F126
F127
F128
F129
Cartridge
Fuse
MiniFuse
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
15 Amp
Blue
15 Amp
Blue
Description
Cavity
Mirrors
F130
Steering Column
Control Module
Audio Amplifier
F131
Trailer Tow – If
Equipped
Radio
F132
Video/DVD – If
Equipped
F133
Cartridge
Fuse
MiniFuse
15 Amp
Blue
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
Description
Climate Control/
Instrument Panel
Passenger
Assistance/Hands
Free System – If
Equipped
Tire Pressure
Module
Spare
7
592 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Underhood Fuses (Power Distribution Center)
The power distribution center is located in the engine
compartment.
Cavity
F101
Power Distribution Center
Cartridge
Fuse
60 Amp
Yellow
F102
60 Amp
Yellow
F103
60 Amp
Yellow
F105
60 Amp
Yellow
MiniFuse
Description
Interior Power
Distribution Center
Rail
Interior Power
Distribution Center
Rail
Interior Power
Distribution Center
Rail
Interior Power
Distribution Center
Rail Ignition Run
Relay
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 593
Cavity
F106
F139
F140
F141
F142
F143
Cartridge
Fuse
60 Amp
Yellow
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
MiniFuse
Description
Cavity
Interior Power Distribution Center
Rail Run/Accessory
Relays
Climate Control
System Blower
Power Locks
F144
Anti-Lock Brake
System
Glow Plugs – If
Equipped
Exterior Lights 1
F148
F145
F146
F147
F149
F150
Cartridge
Fuse
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
MiniFuse
Description
Exterior Lights 2
To Body Computer
– Lamp
Spare
Spare
Radiator Fan Motor
Starter Solenoid
25 Amp
Natural
Powertrain Control
Modules
7
594 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F151
F152
F153
F156
F157
Cartridge
Fuse
30 Amp
Pink
MiniFuse
25 Amp
Natural
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
Description
Cavity
Headlamp Washer
Motor – If
Equipped
Diesel Fuel Heater
– If Equipped
Fuel Pump
F158
Cartridge
Fuse
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
F159
F160
F161
Brake/Electronic
Stability Control
Module
Power Tranfer Unit
Module – If
Equipped
MiniFuse
F162
50 Amp
Red
F163
50 Amp
Red
Description
Active Hood Module – If Equipped
Spare
Interior Lights
Horn
Cabin Heater #1/
Vacuum Pump – If
Equipped
Cabin Heater #2 –
If Equipped
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 595
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
F164
25 Amp
Natural
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
30 Amp
Green
10 Amp
Red
F165
F166
F167
F168
F169
MiniFuse
40 Amp
Green
Cartridge
Fuse
MiniFuse
Description
Cavity
Powertrain Auto
Shutdown
Powertrain
Shutdown
Spare
F170
15 Amp
Blue
F172
20 Amp
Yellow
25 Amp
Natural
20 Amp
Yellow
30 Amp
Green
10 Amp
Red
F173
Powertrain
Shutdown
Air Conditioner
Clutch
Emissions – Partial
Zero Emissions
Vehicle Motor
F174
F175
F176
Description
Emissions – Partial
Zero Emissions
Vehicle Actuators
Spare
Anti Lock Brake
Valves
Siren – If Equipped
Spare
Powertrain Control
Modules
7
596 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
F177
20 Amp
Yellow
F178
25 Amp
Natural
10 Amp
Red
F179
F181
F182
F184
REPLACEMENT BULBS
MiniFuse
100
Amp
Blue
50 Amp
Red
30 Amp
Pink
Description
All Wheel Drive
Module – If
Equipped
Sunroof – If
Equipped
Battery Sensor
Electrohydraulic
Steering (EHPS) – If
Equipped
Cabin Heater #3 –
If Equipped
Front Wiper Motor
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
578
Courtesy/Reading
Lamps (Incandescent)
Courtesy/Reading
LED (Serviced at
Lamps (Optional LED)
Authorized Dealer)
Glove Box Lamp
194
Cargo Lamp
579
Optional Door Map
LED (Serviced at
Pocket/Cupholder
Authorized Dealer)
For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for
replacement instructions.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 597
Exterior Bulbs
Low Beam Headlamp
High Beam Headlamp
Front Park/Turn Signal
Side Marker Lamp
Front Fog Lamp
Center High Mounted
Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
License Lamp
Exterior Bulbs – Rear (LED Version)
Bulb Number
9006
9005
3757AK
168
PSX24W
LED (Serviced at
Authorized Dealer)
168
Rear Tail/Stop Lamp
Rear Tail (Liftgate) Lamp
Rear Turn Signal Lamp
Backup Lamp
Bulb Number
LED (Serviced at
Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at
Authorized Dealer)
WY21W
W21W
Exterior Bulbs – Rear (Bulb Version)
Rear Tail/Stop/Turn
Signal Lamp
Rear Tail (Liftgate) Lamp
Backup Lamp
Bulb Number
P27/7W
P27/7W
P27/7W
7
598 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
Front Low/High Beam Headlamp, Turn
Signal/Park Lamp, And Side Marker Lamp
1. Open the hood.
NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the air cleaner
filter housing and position the Totally Integrated Power 1 — Front Turn Signal/Park Lamp Bulb
Module (TIPM) aside to replace certain lamps in the left 2 — Side Marker Lamp Bulb
3 — Low Beam Headlamp Bulb
headlamp housing.
4 — High Beam Headlamp Bulb
2. Rotate the applicable bulb and connector assembly ¼
turn counterclockwise and remove the assembly from 3. Disconnect the bulb from the harness connector and
the headlamp housing.
then connect the replacement bulb.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 599
CAUTION!
2. Remove the electrical connector from the fog lamp
housing.
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
4. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the
headlamp housing and rotate it ¼ turn clockwise to
lock it in place.
Front Fog Lamp
NOTE: Turn the steering wheel to the right if replacing
the left front fog lamp or to the left if replacing the right
front fog lamp to allow for easier access to the front of the
Front Fog Lamp Electrical Connector
wheel well.
3. Squeeze the two tabs on the side of the bulb socket and
pull straight out from the fog lamp.
1. Remove the fasteners retaining the front lower wheel
well access panel and remove the access panel.
7
600 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Changing The Rear Turn Signal Lamp
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove the two fasteners from the inboard side of the
tail lamp housing.
4. Install the replacement bulb and connector assembly
straight into the fog lamp until it locks into place.
5. Reinstall the front lower wheel well access panel and
fasteners.
Rear Turn Signal And Backup Lamp
The tail lamps are a two-piece design. The tail/stop/rear
turn signal lamps are located in the rear corner body
panels. The tail and backup lamps are located in the
liftgate.
Inboard Tail Lamp Housing Fasteners
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 601
3. Carefully insert a trim stick (plastic flat-blade tool) Changing The Backup Lamp
between the body panel and the outboard side of the
1. Open the liftgate.
tail lamp housing with one hand and grasp the flange
on the inboard side of the tail lamp housing with the 2. Remove the two fasteners retaining the tail lamp
housing to the liftgate from the inboard face of the
other hand. Use the trim stick and hand pressure
liftgate.
together to disengage the tail lamp housing from the
vehicle.
4. Rotate the applicable bulb’s electrical connector ¼ turn
counterclockwise and remove it from the tail lamp
housing.
5. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install
the replacement bulb.
7
6. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the tail
lamp housing and rotate the connector ¼ turn clockwise to lock it in place.
7. Reinstall the tail lamp housing and fasteners.
Tail Lamp Housing Retainers
602 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Carefully insert a trim stick (plastic flat-blade tool) 5. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install
between the tail lamp housing and the liftgate. Use the
the replacement bulb.
trim stick and hand pressure together to disengage the
6. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the
tail lamp housing from the liftgate.
housing and rotate the connector ¼ turn clockwise to
lock it in place.
7. Reinstall the tail lamp housing and fasteners.
License Plate Lamp
1. Push the small locking tab sticking out of the end of
the lens toward the side of the vehicle and hold it in
that position.
Tail Gate Lamp
4. Rotate the applicable bulb’s electrical connector ¼ turn
counterclockwise and remove it from the housing.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 603
3. Hold the lens with one hand and rotate the bulb’s
electrical connector ¼ turn counterclockwise with the
other hand and then separate the bulb and connector
assembly from the lens.
4. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install
the replacement bulb.
5. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the lens
and rotate the connector ¼ turn clockwise to lock it in
place.
6. Insert the end of the lens without the locking tab into
the housing on the liftgate and then push the opposite
License Lamp
end of the lens into the housing, making sure it locks
2. Insert a small flat-blade tool between the end of the
in the housing.
lens with the locking tab and the surrounding housing
and then pivot the tool to separate the lens from the
housing.
7
604 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUID CAPACITIES
Fuel (Approximate)
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Models
All-Wheel Drive Models
Engine Oil With Filter
2.4L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
3.6L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
Cooling System*
2.4L Engine and Single or Dual-Zone Climate Control System
(MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula)
2.4L Engine and Three-Zone Climate Control System (MOPAR®
Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula)
U.S.
Metric
20.5 Gallons
21 Gallons
77.6 Liters
79.8 Liters
4.5 Quarts
6 Quarts
4.26 Liters
5.6 Liters
10.7 Quarts
10.1 Liters
11.6 Quarts
11.0 Liters
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 605
3.6L Engine and Single or Dual-Zone Climate Control System
(MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula)
3.6L Engine and Three-Zone Climate Control System (MOPAR®
Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
U.S.
13.1 Quarts
Metric
12.4 Liters
14.5 Quarts
13.7 Liters
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as
MOPAR, Pennzoil®, and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap
for correct SAE grade.
7
606 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Component
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs – 2.4L Engine
Spark Plugs – 3.6L Engine
Fuel Selection
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as
MOPAR, Pennzoil®, and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap
for correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Engine Oil Filter.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
87 Octane
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 607
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Power Transfer Unit (PTU)
Rear Drive Assembly (RDA)
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Use only ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Failure to use ATF+4® fluid may affect the function or performance of
your transmission.
We recommend MOPAR® ATF+4® fluid.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Gear Lubricant 75W-90.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Gear Lubricant 75W-90.
We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3, SAE J1703. If DOT 3 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Power Steering Fluid + 4, or
MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid.
7
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
▫ Maintenance Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612 N
C
E
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
610 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, “Change Oil” will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled maintenance.
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indi- your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by referring
cator message will illuminate. This means that service is to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle Information
required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in “Understanding
frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambi- Your Instrument Panel” or under “Instrument Cluster
ent temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will influence when Description/Odometer/Trip Odometer” in “Understanding
the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Required” message is Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the
change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter(5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months,
whichever comes first.
soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Severe Duty All Models
equipped vehicles, “Oil Change Required” will be dis- Change Engine Oil at 4000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle is
played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound, operated in a dusty and off road environment. This type of
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 611 M
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level.
• Check windshield washer fluid level.
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, power steering and transmission
(2.4L engine only) and fill as needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights
Required Maintenance Intervals.
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following
page for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter.
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required.
• Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped
with dipstick.
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses
and park brake.
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and
hoses.
• Inspect exhaust system.
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
8
Maintenance Chart
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
ends, and replace if necessary.
Inspect the brake linings, parking
brake function.
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
30,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
48,000
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
20,000
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
612 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
32,000
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter.
Replace air conditioning filter.
Replace spark plugs
(2.4L Engine). **
Replace spark plugs
(3.6L Engine). **
Flush and replace the engine
coolant at 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km)
whichever comes first.
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
32,000
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 613 M
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
X
X
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter.
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your
vehicle for any of the following:
police, taxi, fleet, or frequent
trailer towing.
Replace rear drive assembly
(RDA) fluid.
Replace power transfer unit
(PTU) fluid.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
32,000
20,000
M 614 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
Mileage or time passed
N
(whichever comes first)
T
E
N
Or Years: 2
A
Or
Kilometers:
N
C
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 615 M
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .619
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .619 䡵 MOPAR® PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .623
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center. . . . . . .620
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . .620
▫ In Mexico Contact:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .624
9
618 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .626
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 619
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know.
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
9
620 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer name
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
correctly and in a timely manner.
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
solved with this process.
P.O. Box 21–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
Phone: (800) 423–6343
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer P.O. Box 1621
center.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenPhone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 621
Mexico, D. F.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Service Contract
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
In Mexico Contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
9
622 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 623
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– 9153),
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom- or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administramended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle tor, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building,
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other inforoperating at its best.
mation about motor vehicle safety from http://
www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
MOPAR® PARTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy cam- roadsafety/
paign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your authorized dealer, and
the manufacturer.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause
a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.
9
624 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshootNOTE: A street address is required when ordering
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Service Manuals
Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the inforThese Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
mation that students and professional technicians need in
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acdiagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintainquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles.
ing, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC veIncluded are starting, operating, emergency and maintehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components is written in straightforward nance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities
and safety tips.
language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 625
Call toll free at:
Treadwear
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet
pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
requirements in addition to these grades.
9
626 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance,
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
628 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .571
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
Airbag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .556
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
Air Conditioning, Rear Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
All Wheel Drive (AWD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
Arming System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Automatic Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
INDEX 629
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . .271
Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . .
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . .
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle
Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.442
.440
.607
.436
.438
.438
.439
.575
.575
.436
.307
.419
.105
.231
.596
.110
Back-Up Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .24
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562 Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
10
630 INDEX
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Steering . . . . . . . . .
Radiator (Coolant Pressure)
Carbon Monoxide Warning . .
Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . .
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . .
Cargo Compartment . . . . . . .
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . .
Cargo Load Floor . . . . . . . . .
Cargo Management System . .
Rollaway Tonneau Cover . .
Tri-Fold Load Floor . . . . . .
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . .
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . .
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.493
.547
.435
.572
.107
.288
.285
.285
.285
.294
.286
.286
.288
.286
.287
.286
.583
.376
Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .302
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Computer, Trip/Travel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
INDEX 631
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI)
Conserving Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) .
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . .
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . .
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . .
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . .
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.373
.321
.280
.254
.621
.572
.568
.571
.604
.569
.573
.569
.573
.574
.572
.572
.569
.582
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
Dimmer Switch, Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
10
632 INDEX
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . .
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) .
Door Opener, Garage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257 Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy. . . . . .321
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System™) . . . . . .350
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489 Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . .
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . .271 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . .
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . .240
. . . . .444
. . . . .252
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.538
.517
.520
.534
.517
.541
.550
.105
.556
.417
.105
.553
.547
.548
.569
.568
INDEX 633
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Euro Twin Clutch Transmission
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Exhaust Gas Caution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Exhaust System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Exterior Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Exterior Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Fabric Care. . . . . . . . .
Filler Location Fuel . . .
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . .
Air Conditioning . .
Engine Oil . . . . . . .
Engine Oil Disposal
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . .
Turn Signal . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.556
.404
.556
.556
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
10
634 INDEX
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
Fluid Leaks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . .
Filler Door (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . .
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.605
.228
.599
.214
.538
.484
.493
.487
.485
.321
.485
.309
.309
.484
.309
.316
.487
.485
.484
INDEX 635
Requirements . . . .
Saver Mode . . . . .
Specifications . . . .
Tank Capacity . . . .
Fuel, Flexible . . . . . .
Fueling . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel Optimizer . . . . .
Fuel Saver . . . . . . . .
Fuel System Caution .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®)
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . .
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gasoline (Fuel)
Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . .
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.484
.321
.605
.604
.489
.493
.321
.321
.494
.588
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
. . . . . . . . . . . .257 Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
. . . . . . . . . . . .493
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .485
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .321 Headlights
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .485
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .310
. . .431
. . .517
. . .226
. . .598
. . .586
10
636 INDEX
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . .
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch .
Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Holder, Coin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.227
.598
.230
.228
.227
.230
.225
.227
.208
.122
.202
.417
.230
.449
HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Ignition
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
. . .501 Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
. . .280 Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
. . .277 Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .233
INDEX 637
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275 Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525 Latches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520 Latch Plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534 Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Keyless Go. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Light Bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Knee Bolster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
10
638 INDEX
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . . .447
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . .
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . .
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator)
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . .
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.231
.602
.228
.316
.302
.232
.232
.598
.230
.232
.600
.600
.307
.310
.596
.302
.598
.305
.447
INDEX 639
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . .302
Load Floor, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine).
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Transaxle
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Marker Lights, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.557
.552
.302
.624
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.581
.581
.232
.598
.575
.485
.322
.119
.119
.121
.121
.122
.122
.120
10
640 INDEX
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
Mode
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484 Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304 Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305 Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305 Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
INDEX 641
Overhead Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
ParkSense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Passenger Seat Back Tilt (Easy Entry System). . . . . .219
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Phone (Uconnect®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .457
Power
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .271
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
Transfer Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607
Power Transfer Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) . .21
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap)
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.464
.572
.376
.374
10
642 INDEX
Rear Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
Rear Drive Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Rear Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Rear Wiper/Washer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Reclining Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
Release, Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .374
Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Restraint, Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Retractable Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Reverse Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
INDEX 643
Roof Rack (Luggage Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
Safety, Exhaust Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . .56
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Reclining Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
10
644 INDEX
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction Indicator) . .302
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624
Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Side View Mirror Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Signals, Turn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Spare Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
Steering
Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .374
Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
INDEX 645
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . . .66
Sway Control, Trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Taillights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . .
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . .
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . .
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire and Loading Information Placard .
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . .
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.302
.600
.236
.310
.287
.236
.227
.457
.451
.110
.470
.461
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Information . . . . . . . . .
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . .
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . .
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.472
.520
.467
.461
.464
.463
.520
.470
.457
.474
.305
.625
.464
.470
.473
.451
.452
.466
.521
10
646 INDEX
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . .
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . .
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . .
To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Behind a Motorhome . . . . . . . . . .
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . .
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.469
.507
.469
.451
.504
.223
.497
.512
.541
.502
.512
.502
.512
.430
.443
.448
.497
.512
.501
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
Transaxle
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .24
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®). . . .257
Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .21
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .21
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
INDEX 647
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . .18
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373 Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Uconnect® (Hands-Free Phone)
Making A Phone Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
Uconnect® Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .302
Underhood Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592 Warnings and Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .373 Washer
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484 Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585 Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Wind Buffeting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458 Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
10
648 INDEX
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Windshield Defroster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
Wiper, Delay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Wiper, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Wrecker Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency
signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone equipment must
be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must
be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly to the
battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. The
negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal
adjacent to the negative battery connection. This connection
should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof or
the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in mounting
antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect the accuracy
or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed
away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only fully
shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a
low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal
may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference
between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s
electronic systems.
2014 Charger SRT
OWNER’S MANUAL
Chrysler Group LLC
14D482-126-AA
14JC49-126-AB
2014
First Edition
Second
Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Charger
SRT
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement